(logo)
(navigation image)
Home American Libraries | Canadian Libraries | Universal Library | Open Source Books | Project Gutenberg | Biodiversity Heritage Library | Children's Library | Additional Collections

Search: Advanced Search

Anonymous User (login or join us)Upload
See other formats

Full text of "Syriac Grammar."

SYRIAC GRAMMAR. 



BY 

GEORGE PHILLIPS, D.D. 

PRESIDENT OP QUEENS' COLLEGE CAMBRIDGE. 



THE THIRD EDITION, 

BEVISED AND ENLARGED. 



CAMBRIDGE': DEIGHTON, BELL, & CO, ; 
LONDON: BELL & DALDY. 

1866 



LONDON : 

- IT. WATTS, CEOWX CGTTBT, TEMPLE. BAE. 



PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION, 



THE following "Elements of Syriac Grammar" are 
intended for the assistance of those Students in He- 
brew, who are desirous of extending their studies to 
the Syriao language. This object may be easily ac- 
complished in consequence of the close affinity which 
exists between the two languages, both in 'their struc- 
ture as well as in the multitude of words which they 
possess in common. By bestowing therefore a small 
portion of time and labour on the study of Syriac, the 
Hebrew scholar will be sure to obtain a moderate 
knowledge of the subject. It is indeed so nearly 
allied to Hebrew, and especially to Chaldee, that 
after he has read the Chaldee parts of the Bible he 
may at once proceed to the reading of Syriac, Such 
being the case, it becomes important that the student 
should avail himself of the assistance which the 
Syriac affords him for the better understanding of 
Hebrew; not to mention that by it he will be 
brought to an acquaintance with numerous eccle- 
siastical documents belonging to the early and middle 
ages, which treat of the creed and practice of the 



IV PEERAGE. 

Syrian branch of the church of Christ in those times. 
The Syriac, as a dialect of the Hebrew, must always 
be regarded as constituting a source of valuable 
information for the criticism of the Hebrew Bible. 
By an examination of a Hebrew word as it is used 
in this language, essential service has been rendered 
in elucidating many difficult and important passages 
of Holy Writ ; and it has been the constant practice 
of commentators to have recourse to Syriac, whenever 
the Text of the Old Testament fails to establish 
satisfactorily the signification of a word. In such 
case every person allows that a reference to Syriac 
is one of the legitimate means to be employed in 
determining the sense of a passage; and although 
this language is inferior to Arabic in the extent and 
variety of its literature, it is nevertheless superior as 
regards its much more intimate connection with the 
original language of the Bible. 

But the great claim, as it appears to me, which 
the Syriac has on the attention of that class of per- 
sons, for whose use this book is intended, consists in 
the Syriac New Testament. The high antiquity of 
this version, and its use in the early established Syrian 
church, stamp an importance on it which can be 
assigned to no other : and if, in addition to these 
circumstances it be borne in mind, that the Syriac 



PREFACE. y 

language is so nearly the same as that spoken in 
Palestine in the first age of Christianity, that by 
many persons it has been termed the vernacular lan- 
guage of our Lord, it must be allowed that the Syriao 
New Testament possesses a value inferior only to that 
which belongs to the original. Michaelis, who de- 
voted his great talents to the study of Syriac, and 
to an examination, of the Syriac version, has en- 
deavoured, in his Introduction to the New Testament, 
to fix the period when that version was made ; and 
after bringing forward many cogent arguments in 
favour of its high antiquity, has inferred that it must 
have existed, either at the end of the first or the 
beginning of the Hecoiul century. This great age, 
and its frequent deviation from the common reading 
in passages of importance, must recommend the use of 
it to every critic ; and tho truth is, that it has been 
more uftod than all other sources of critical assistance 
together, 

Prom those remarks it will obviously appear desir- 
able that tho Hebrew scholar should not rest satisfied 
till ho has obtained a knowledge of tho Syriac. To 
afford facility for this attainment was my groat in* 
duooment in sending forth, a few years ago, these 
Elements of Syriac Grammar to the public ; and I 
rfljoico that tho book, having been favourably received, 

A* 



VI PUSVACK. 

has afforded me satisfactory proof thai I ho publication 
has not entirely failed in being useful. The coph's 
of the first impression having ken sold oil', [ havft 
now tho pleasure of presenting a nwoml Edition, con- 
taining many amendments and additions, which b.w 
Leon made for tho purpose of adapting tho Grammar 
to the somewhat more advanced Ktato to which flyriac 
literature lias now gradually arrived, 

In introducing these additionH tho plan of flic 
Grammar has not been at all (listurld, and I think 
I may cite, as equally applicable to this rrjmhlimtiou 
of the book, the words I employed in (lit! jtrcfoeo to 
tho first Edition whou speaking of the manner in 
which it was executed, " I have endeavoured to bo 
simple in tho arrangement, to account for tho vowel 
changes, and tho various inflexions of words by (he 
operation of a very few principles, and to exhibit in a 
concise form the general structure of f ho language" 



PREFACE TO THE THIRD EDITION. 

IN tliis Edition of the Syriac Grammar I have 
introduced a considerable quantity of new matter. 
To make room for it, the Chrestomathy, which 
appeared in the second Edition, has been omitted. 
In the course of the last twenty years many Chresto- 
mathies and Syriac books have issued from the press. 
These I consider supply ample assistance to the 

student in his early attempts at translation. Again, 



the study of Syriac has of late years made beyond all 
doubt an advance in this country, There are not only 
more persons who at the present timo apply them- 
selves to tho language; but there is also a larger 
number of mature scholars than England could lay 
claim to a quarter of a century ago, For these 
reasons it appeared to me that the space in the second 
Edition, which was taken up with Chrestomathy, 
might in this be much more usefully filled by the 
introduction of additional Grammar. Whatever new 
forms or inflexions of words, or whatever new eon* 
structions have been discovered in the Syriac MSS., 
which have been recently edited, I have taken care 
to bring before the notice of tho student. I think 
there arc few points of Grammar which will not bo 



PREFACE. 



found touched upon in the following pages. Its laws 
and principles I have endeavoured to develop, and, in 
accordance with them, to classify the nouns, and to 
explain the irregularities in the verbs, and the changes 
which words undergo in the process of inflexion. I 
trust, therefore, that this new Edition, since the ele- 
mentary character of the former Editions is preserved, 
whilst the higher parts of Grammar are introduced 
into it, will he thought adapted to meet the wants of 
the beginner, and will also, to some extent, be found 
profitable to the ripor student. I might have made 
a larger book by greatly inevoasing the numbor of 
examples ; but a larger book than necessary ought on 
every account to bo avoided, and a rule of Grammar 
may iu general bo as well illustrated by one or two 
examples as by twenty. 



CONTENTS. 



JPAGK 

ImoDUCTOBY Observations ...... 1 

Tho Alphabet ......... 8 

VowolB - ...... 10 

Diphthongs ......... H 

Properties and changes of Consonants U 

Clwingos of flio Vowels ....... 18 



Tho Diacritic Points, Ku&hoi and Eukok 20 

Ribui .......... 24 

Lines .......... 26 

Marhotono and Mohagyouo ...... 28 

Other Diiicritic Points ....... 30 

On the pronunciation of certain letters, &c, - - - 31 

Acccmt ......... 32 

Method of oxprosHing numbers ------ 33 

Heading Eiorciaoa ....... 35 

NOUN8 .......... 37 

Gander ........ 38 

Number .......... 40 

BtatCHufNouna ........ 43 



. . . ..... 55 

PRONOUNS .......... 60 

Ponwud Pjroncran* - ..... 50 



Demonstrative Pronouns ....... gj 

Relative and Interrogative Pronouns - - . . OS 

Pronominal Affixes - - 63 

Nouns with Affixes ...... C5 

Example of a nifific, noun with Affixes - * - - C5 

Example of a fern, noun with Affixes CO 
Numerals and Particles with affixes - - - .71 

VERBS .......... 73 

Tenses, &c, of the Verbs |o<n and M - 77 

* 

Paradigm of ^^D ....... 84 

Olworvations OH regular Verbs ..... &p, 

Verbs which iwvo a pfuttuwil for a nul. luttor - . 91 

The ProHOiit TeiiH<, Ac. - - - 91 

IERKUULAE VKHIW ....... 93 

Verbs p or *& ........ 94. 



Verbs o^ or ^ . , - Oi) ^ 

- 100 



......... 107 

'* 

... V * - - - - . . . 107 

* 
Paradigm of )ooa ....... 10^ 



Verbs 



CONTENTS XI 

PAOH 

The Objective affixes attached to Verbs - - - -115 

Paradigm of ]p 11C 

Observations on Objective affixes 323 

The Verb jJ^with Affixes 125 

Paradigm of the Verb JB^- 12<5 

Doubly Defective Verbs 129 

Qiiadrilitoral Verba 130 

PARTICLES 132 

Adverbfl 132 

PrcpositionH 134 


Conjunctions and Interjections 1 34 

SYNTAX 

Syntax of NmniB 135 

OloiiHtrud.ion of Adjectives 140 

Numerals 143 

Syntax of Pronouns 145 

Verbs 155 

Adverbs - 177 

Prepositions 178 

Conjunction 180 

Interjections - 183 

Interrogative* - - 184 

}Snallage of PovHons 186 

... ' ... Ellipsis , 187 

,,. , . Coltoofction of Words 188 

SyriftoMotreB 100 

APPENDIX 190 



INTRODUCTORY OBSERVATIONS, 



TEE TSyriac language, a branch of the Shemitic family, 
was the vernacular tongue of Syria for many ages pre- 
viously to the Christian Era, and continued to be so 
till the period of the Mohammedan invasion of the 
country, when Arabic was introduced as the language 
of the conquerors, and in a short time entirely super* 
sodod that which had been heretofore in use. It was 
also caUodAramraan, as the country itself had anciently 
the designation of Aramc&a or Aram probably, as is 
supposed from Aram the son of Shorn, by whose de- 
scendants it was peopled. This name scorns to liave 
obtained in very remote times, being known to llomer, 
who calls the inhabitants ty^w, IL IL 783. The 
word is found in 2 Kings xviii 26 ; Isaiah xrm. 11 ; 
and Daniel il 4 

The early history of the Syrians is but little known. 
With the exception of a few particulars, which may 
be gathered from Scripture, little can be said about 
them till the time they were carried away into tine 
kingdom of Assyria. It is considered that the de- 
scendants of Ham were the earliest inhabitants of the 
country. The Scripture evidence on this point rest* 

a 



2 INTRODUCTORY OBSERVATIONS. 

on Gen. x. 6, 15, 18. It seems that some time before 
that of Abraham,, these occupants began to be sup- 
planted by the posterity of Shorn. This appears from 
I he Shcmitic names prevalent in the country, when 
Abraham first entered it; such as Shcmcbcr, Abimc- 
loch, Mclclrizedek, &c. David, after waging war with 
the Syrians, having been successful in many battles, 
compelled the country to submit to his government. 
After the kingdom of the Jews became divided into 
two, tho Syrians delivered themselves from foreign 
subjection ; but only to be made a part of the gi-cat 
Assyrian empire. Sulwcciuontly it passed to the 
Babylonians, then to the monarchs of Persia; but 
HOOR after the conquests of Alexander, it fell under 
Greek rule, and became more prominent simony the 
nations. SeleucuH, one of Alexander's generals, nflei* 
the deatli of his master, was mado governor of .Baby- 
lon, and, tempted by tho example of his brother gene- 
rals, sol up for himself, when, after obtaining some 
victories over Anligonusand Nieanor, he took the title 
of King of Babylon and Media, II n continued on tho 
throne till bis death, whon he \VUH succeeded by his 
son, and HO on, ilio country being ruled by hi family 
for several generations, Iho last of whom was Antio- 
chuw, who began to roign u.c. 225, This monarch, 
pONHOHsed of great military talents and beiritf very 
ambitious, soon <m#a#ed in tho dew^u of oxlouding 
his kingdom* Accordingly Lo inuhn-took an expe- 
dition nguinut the Vavthiann, whom h obliged to 



v osi:iiv moxs. ;; 

conclude a peace on very advantageous terms. lie, 
afterwards gained victories in Baetria and India. In 
the year 201 B.C. he entered into a league; with Philip 
ofMaecdon against. Ptolemy Epiphancs, tho king of 
Egypt, lie defeated tho Egyptian general, and re- 
covered all Palestine and Ccjnlos v \ ria. After this lie. 
invaded Asia Minor in the hopr k s of reducing it also; 
hut the free cities had recourse 1o tho i tomans, who 
soon made a declaration of wnr sigimiKl Antiochus, 
vanquished him lirst at Thermopylae, and afterwards 
so completely al, llagin'sisi, thai Ilio issue, of tlt<* 
battle was, that Syria liecamo a itomftn provinc< v - 
Such being, in a ftnv words, the history of the- (;<>un- 
try, we might inter that tho language! would, sifter 
the people, hud mingled \rilh (he Persians, partake 
of the Persian Idiom; that, ninny terms und phrases 
would ho common to both languages; and this we 
find is tho ease. Again, for the same reason, many 
Greek and Latin words have crept into the. Syritie, 
as wo perceive from the Peshito version of the New 
Testament, but mow especially from writings of a 
much later date, such, for insf-nnoe, as l,hn Chronicles 
of liar-HobrwiiN, Most of these words nre nouns, 
and some Greek particles are inirocluml; but very 
few verbs appear to have a foreign origin. \Ve will 
subjoin a few examples of such lewis, both as they 
appear in the Nyr'wc and in tho original. 



INTROOTCTOKY OBSERVATIONS. 
IVrsum KjJ 



TUTTOV, 



worn, 



}Lo 



A 



rwritwa. 



The Arabw im<l Turkn, tVoiu their wnnection witli 
tho country, Imvo also cxcrcuwxl an hiflucmoo over the 
Ryriru) ]aup;ua{^. Tho OrunadoRi too, wore tho mmtm 



INTRODUCTORY OBSERVATIONS. 5 

of getting some European words, chiefly proper iwmes, 
and titles, introduced into the Syrian, thus wo find 

f 

yjoo count 9 \*+\s* prince, *uz>$c marquis. 

The Syriac and Ohaldoo are evidently dialects of 
the same language, their differences, which ar<* very 
small, consisting nearly as much in 1he pronunciation 
as in grammatical inflexions and constructions. Sec, 
tho Preface. Tho lormer was spoken iu Western 
Aram tea, and the latter in the, Bust cm, vis?, in iho 
province of Uabylon, bctwoou the Kuj)liralis and ih 
Tigris. 

Tho most anoiont Syriao writ ings are said io lx* ihe 
apocryphal Letter, which Ahgnr the Icin^ scnf. to 
Christ, and our Lord's answer. There nro also thosn 
who thinlc that the original of Si. jMaf(h(i\v*s Gospel 
was writte.n in Syriac. J3e this as il may, th^iv is no 
doul)t of the very early e\'isien<<i of a Syrian version 
of this and of the other GospHs, and it is perhaps 1ho 
oldest documonli v?u know of; for the letter of Ab#ar 
was most likoly wriii<m lon# after the, ]>eriod to whiHi 
it refers. 

The Syrians, like many other amrienl nations, linvo 
laid claim to the invention of letters; but those who 
have investigated this suhjoct, supposing the rt of 
writing to he a mere, human invention and nof. a 
divine pi ft, are inclined to assign the discovery either 
to the Egyptians or IMiuuiic&uiH. JYom the PhdMii- 
oiau or Cluildoo oluiurtcrH f 1.11(7 suppose the, Syriao 
wore derived, as well as the Aruhiu. 



(f INTRODUCTORY OBSERVATIONS. 

The arc two sets of Syriac letters, tlio one bohi<? a 
modification of the other, or both of them havinpf a 
common original. They are called the EstraiitfHo 
and Peshito. The former is found in iho oldest 
MSS., and in many monumental inscriptions. It is 
written in Syriac P^fH, which Assemuni, in his 
Bibl. Orient. Torn. iv. p, 378, supposes to 1)0 the same 
as the Greek word <7rpoyyvXo?, round; but as romd* 
ness is not a characteristic of this alphabet, J. 3). 
Michaelis and Adler have sought out another olymo- 

c 

logy, viz. the Arab, ^k*, a writing and Josr*) </M/^'/. 
The latter is more modem, and is the OHO wliioh is 
generally used by the Maronites and Jacob itos. Tin* 
origin of these characters is uncertain. It is ordi- 
narily assigned to the seventh century, and It is said 
that they were introduced by Jacob of Edesaa. It is 
most likely, however, that they were gradually dn- 
veloped, and underwent several modifications, be- 
fore they assumed the precise forms which we HOW 
have. It is supposed that the Estrangelo IcUors mm* 
employed in copies of the Scriptures, whilst tho LV 
shito alphabet, because it could be written with muHt 
greater rapidity, was that which was hi use for th<! 
common purposes of life. 

The Nestorians use characters partly resembling 
the Estrangelo, and partly the Peshito; they occupy 
as it were a middle place between tho two 
and persons accustomed to read these, may 
make out the Nestorian, 



INTRODTJCTOKY OBSERVATIONS. *7 

It lias been very mucli tlie practice of the Syrians, 
since Arabic became the spoken language of the 
country, to write it with Syriac letters. This mode 
of writing is called, after the name of the inventor, 
Carshunic. 



. 1. The Syrians, in common with many other 
Eastern nations, read from the right hand to the left, 
and have the same number of letters, which are all 
consonants, as the Hebrews. 

The following Table exhibits their forms, names, 
powers, and numerical values. 



INTRODUCTORY OBSERVATIONS. 9 

. It appears from the forms of the letters exhibited 
in page 8 that all of them except 1 9 a o } ^ a L 
may be joined to the following letter of the word, 
and that the nine letters a ^* 4 - a & + termi- 
nating a word, receive a slight additional stroke, and 
are written o . -* 4 * * *& ^ -* . The five 
a ^ io j i> alter their figure at the end of a word, 
assuming the forms ^ 3 ^, >o, r or ^, ^. 

Oaro must be taken to distinguish between the 
following letters, which have nearly the same figure, 
and differ chiefly in their magnitude, 

1 * > * - ^ ^ 

} => 9 O J ' i> ^ 

a 

It may be also observed that one letter is joined to 
another by a small horizontal line drawn from its 
extremity ; as, 01 in <jiX The exceptions to this are 
> 4 9 and L) which when joined to another letter 
assume the forms *&\ and &.. 

The following compound characters are frequently 
used. 

Olaph-Lomad ^ for ^| 

Lomad-Olaph p . . 1^ 
Lomad-Lomad ^ . 



As letters of the same organ are frequently 
changed for one another in the process of deriva- 
tion, Grammarians have divided the whole Alphabet 
into classes according to the organ of speech by which, 
they arc enounced. 



1Q VOWELS. 

Gutturals ] 01 ** ^ 

Linguals \ 4 * J *- 

Palatids ^ * ^ 

Dentals 1 ^ 3 ' * 

Labials o o ic ^ 

The consonants 1 o -, frequently b<JConw(|iiicsc><Mii, 
j. (?. lose their power as consonants ; as is the csiso wit h 
tho Hebrew ' 



2, Vowels. 

It is probable that the quiescent Him 1 o * \v<w 
used in the early stages of tho lanfjua*^? as vw\'K 
and were the only vowels which in those linios urrc 
known. The consequence was that many words woiv 
not sufficiently defined in writing, and that a vowel \v as 
often understood, and had to be supplied hi ftpttakhitf. 
To meet this defect, which existed at one period or 
another in the whole family of the Rhumilfc lan- 
guages, a system of punctuation came gradually into 
use. Tho first step taken to moot tho wanis of llu* 
reader was tho introduction of a point, which by UN 
position, above or below a word, indicated tho proper 
vowel. Tho employment of it, howover, was vory par- 
tial, and its primary object, perhaps, was Jitlio mow 
than the determining of those words whtoh, without 
it, would be ambiguous. (Soo Appendix.) When this 
point was first introduced into the written Hyriuo it is 
now impossible to ascertain. Many Grammarians luivu 
assigned its invention to the school of Edmsa ; Intj 
although historical testimony on ikfe nmUer is vifi-v 



VOWELS. 11 

imperfect, we arc nevertheless inclined to go back to 
a more remote period. It is pretty certain tliat it, or 
something equivalent to it, must have been employed 
in the third or fourth century, and perhaps much 
before that time ; for Ephraim must have found some 
note of distinction in Gen. xxxvi. 24, in his comment 
on which he says : ,-1*2+] ]^ol \ 

* 6 ? * ? 1* * O 

|J ^ ^JLi] ofnajj y*] lfi*> o-^o 

Jjf is proper to observe ', ttatf j{{ wow? we find 

in both Testaments, and not Ipc**, as some persons 
have ignorantly thought. In this observation, Ephraim 
must have had some mark whereby he could distin- 
guish ]-^Oi* from ]-fifi*; and it is likely, if we had 
works older than those of Ephraim, we should be able 
to recognize a mode of distinguishing in them the 
moaning of one word from that of another consisting of 
the same consonants, and that mode would probably 
be by the point we are here speaking of. It is quite 
clear, however, that had this point been as extensively 
employed as it is capable of being, still it would be 
quite inadequate for the purposes for which it was 
intended. The precise vowel could not be known by 
such a mark ; and hence Grammarians set themselves 
to work to devise some other method of more fully 
defining the sense and pronunciation of words. Now 
the Greek language and literature were much known 
to the Syriac scholars of the time to which we have 
referred, and their attention having been brought to 
the imperfect condition of their vowel system; and, 



12 VOWELS. 

further, having been able to observe the accuracy 01 
the Greek, they perceived that its vowel H might be. 
advantageously engaged in the service of their own 
language. Two modes of representing ihe said 
vowels were adopted about the same time: on o was 
by means of one or two points being placexl in diffe- 
rent positions, and the other by writing above, or 
below the consonants the Greek signs themselves, \\ it h 
some slight change in their forms. This 8y,slem of 
punctuation was originated by TlieophihiH of Odessa, 
according to Assemani (see hisBibl. Orient. Tom. r. 
p. 64), and was advanced step by step till it was 
brought to its present state of porfoction. Theopli Hits 
died about the year 791 of our era. 

Vowels, by native Grammarians, are called Home- 
times by one and sometimes by another of lh follow- 
ing names : ]&liSo vocals ; ]Q] motions ; 
sounds; luo positions ; \pvipoints. 

The following Table exhibits their names, 
and forms : 

Names. Power. Figure. 

Syr. Greek. 

. v 

Petliocho a 9 o Alpha (A) 

ftovotso o O D o 



OLovotso i ja ^D lota (j) 

t * 

Zekofo ooo Omionm(0) 

EtSOtso u CO OD OD UpHlldti* (Y) 
^ * Tho figure of the vowel Msoteo tuny luivo come from that of the 
diphthong ov. Tho forni of tlio vowel in frcijuimtly oln^mnl in MSH. 
to bo V. 



VOWELS. 13 

The points of the vowel Zekofo may coalesce with 
the point of the letter >, as ~-^<n>" Roli-t'm. 

X 

The vowel Etsotso is always accompanied with o 

* * ir> 

except in the two words ^o cul, ****&, metul. 

When no vowel is expressed, then, as in the Hebrew, 
a Sheva (quiescent or moveable) will be implied 
and read accordingly. 

Vowels may be divided into two classes : pure, i. e. 
those which complete their syllables : impure, i. e. 
those which do not complete the syllable without the 
addition of a terminating consonant, 

Pure Vowek are 



as 

Wlion followed by 
a quiescent | or 

h. 





as p^a ICtlw-bo, *"* 



Impure Fowek are 



7 

, ? as in O cad. 



Men. 
id-to. 



syllables are often, as in Hebrew, 
lously long, on account perhaps of the accent; as, 



14 VOWELS. DIPHTHONGS. 

n, where 1 occurs with two consonants, so 



also -*fc s 

m- X 

3. Diphthongs* 

There are several diphthongs made, l>y Hie letters 
Vauand Yud, which, losing their own pou ers, eojilesee 
with the preceding vowel and form one syllable. 

Vau makes four diphthongs cm, en, in t OH, 

The first occurs at tho beginning middle and end 
of words, and is produced by the vowel 'preeedinu- 
o; as, ^joc| aiirkely liefed^ \&o$ iMnt-uw, Ihe ,/f/-v/, w-n 
ho-nau, this is. 

Tho seconds cu<> is produced}^ i\w vowel ' pr<mlinv 
a.; as ^cna*2U,|j HsU-teii, I will flriufc If. 

Tho third, to, "by a cncvotso pvooodin^; UH, *oia 

7 

7*<? wiM s% ftim ^cnaJ^, n'tJuuMit, Iw mil 

- a* 

him. 

The fourth, ow, is when a radical o is preceded I,v 

* 
another o with >> ; as, ^OQA 8fiOM-(fa-yo 9 a pwunw* 

Yud makes two diphthongs, f^'and ol : <d l>v before 

^7 * 

- ; as, Zu-\^#'to^, </^^ Aff^ wwaled: ol by " before 
*; as, ^01 Iwi, she. 

4. Properties nnd Changes of Consonants 

Consonants possess various properties and undergo 
certain changes arising from tho inlluemw of vowels, 
or other causes, which we proceed to mention. ^! 

The letters ] o -, when they are not 



PROPERTIES AND CHANGES OP CONSONANTS. 15 

but rest in the sound of the vowel on the preceding 
letter, are called quiescent. 

Olapli final rests in" or *; as, jp^fA* mem, IfaL 

the men : except in a few verbs, such as ^ he 

7 ') I 7? 

polluted, V lie comforted, |K lie polluted, \\&L] lie was 

^ A 

decorated. 
Olaph in the middle of a word rests in * or "; as, 

7 7 

^a]i>o to eat, cfco to say. Tud is sometimes changed 

into Olaph quiescent in * ; as, J^D to beget, for ^^o. 

Yud usually rests in * or * ; as, *}* he begum, M 

X I 

is, ^*> but. 

Vau deprived of a vowel is for the most part qui- 
escent in * ; as, VOQS rise, >oa* day. It is also used as 
the fulcrum, or, as it is technically termed, the mater 
lectionis of this vowel ; as, ^o^J, he will kill. 

In foreign words Vau is frequently found to be 
quiescent in the vowel * ; as, uao^La Peter, UDQJO/Z 
throne. 

The letters 1 o * are frequently not pronounced; 
but they are nevertheless written for the sake of 
orthography or etymology. In such instances these 
letters are said to be otiose. 

Olaph in the pronouns <o2ul and ^M, when they 
are added to participles for the sake of forming the 

* V * 

present tense, is otiose; as, <pta] ^-^la kot-litm, and 
^fcjif ^b kot-loten, ye slay, masc. and fern. 
Vau and Yud, in certain persons of the verb, are 



16 PEOPBETIES AND CHANGES OP CONSONANTS. 



also otiose; as, al^Lo Htal> they slac, 3rd. JMTH. plitr. 
prset, masc. *-^U> tital, they slcto, 3rd pors. plur. 
prat. fern, J**4e KM, slay thou, imper. sin}?. frm. 

Tud is likewise otiose in the pronoun -M ///, MM, 
and in certain affixes ; as, < a!SAo ;//, w/// //'//// 
-asL) Viho-Vkek, % iew*. Also in some substantives 

* V 

and adyorbs j as, *-*!^A sfol, frtntguUlUy, -*^j i f ln*n f 



In the above cases o and -* were pronounced in ancient ttin<^ 1 
as is evident from tlie usage in Arabic and Hebrew ; for wi hav<* 

1^. 'ntM , which arc pronounced c/ta/i and aksari\ w !ia\ 
also in the New Testament paftftowl, John xx. 3 (> ; rttMKt Afy, 
Mark v. 41 ; and similar ox^rcsKions. 

Consonants arc sometimes omitted in writing 



especially the weak letter ] ; afi, Uf** <*wrf for z^l, 
particularly in compound words ; as, ^jp mutt for 
WAJ] p, ^aj for ^ *af although. The initial radical K 
of Hebrew words sometimes altogether di sa incurs ; an, 
t- ow^, Eel). TfJKt. Words which have tlio middle 
radical doubled, on many occasion** loao one. of them ; 
thus we have w**, for VAA* he jwrwiwtfi 
from ^3. 

Vau and Yud full off in nearly tho same 
and the same situations as in Hebrew, wlu<*h nuiy 
bo immediately observed by inspecting tho 
of the classes of verbs beginning with thoMn 

Letters are sometimes added to words for tho wake 
of euphony. Thus, Olaph is prefixed to HOMO word* 



PROPERTIES AND CHANGES OP CONSONANTS. 17 

beginning with Tud ; as, W hand for , V^Ll day 

* 5E SC 

for p^u, fvLi fowio- for f*L. In old MSS. especially 
this addition of the Olaph is very frequent. Thus we 
have *S*1, t-^lj -*J*l &c. for t^-, ^^ *$!. 

x ' * = = x x x x 

Greek nouns, which commence with two conso- 
nants, are usually written with an Olaph at the 
beginning; but sometimes without; as, UQJL^CO or 

07* * 

Stephen ; v?*riH stadium ; ]t*s&] spliere ; 

' * 

scheme. 

Olaph prosthetic occurs also in the verbs u*zu and 
as, %*&*.] A& drank, and ^a^l he found. 

* * ff* 7 

We have also It^s, A ^^> from ^TJS Heb. ^^, 
where the Nun seems to be a compensation for the 
Dagesh forte in Ohaldee and Hebrew. 

A great number of Hebrew words become Syriao 
by the change of one or more of their letters. 



f is changed into > as, 1JT gold, 
* ................... 4 ... ttt rock, 

Itf ................... L ... ff mow, 



1 ................... 01 .. ' 

H ................... 1 or * n ^5 ^revealed, 



sometimes into ^ .. H^Jl Juwwdered, 



18 CHANGES OF THE VOWELS. 

5. . Changes of the Vowels. 

Inflexions of words are in numerous cases effected 
by a change of vowels, certain vowels being selected 
as characteristic of diJQferent forms of the same word. 
The correspondence between Syriac and Hebrew 
vowels is as follows : 

Pethocho (') corresponds to Patach (-) ; as, oa 
tote 1m king. 

Revotso (<*) generally to the Hebrew T ; as, j 
"flp^fl thoushalt visit, \z>l, ^W, //*<w dutlt kill. 

Chevots6 (*) to the Hebrew TT; as, oo^ or 
for fty Esau. 

Zekofo (*) to Kamets v ; as, y^f, 075 #*;* 
he revealed. 

Btsotso (*) to Oholem, Kamets Ohatuph, Slmrc^ik and 
Kibbuts; as, jl^, holiness, tthp ; ^., bb,ta e/U. 

Olaph in the beginning of a word, and also Ee in 
the same situation, when followed by en, instead of 
being according to analogy without a vowel, will 

receive a vowel, for the most part * or * ; as ^| for 

. ? * * * 7 * 

N^a| ; joiik for >n. 

Tud observes the same rule at the beginning of a 
word, and takes the vowel ; as, t-S* fie legal for 



The foregoing rule holds good also for the lottm-H 
Olaph, Vau and Tud, when they begin a syllabic, the 
vowel in such places being remitted to the preceding 



UHANGffiS OF THE VOWELS. 19 

letter, if it has been previously without one ; 
except when the Olaph, Vau or Tud is followed by 
two consonants in the same syllable. A full exhi- 
bition of these principles may be seen by looking at 
the irregular verbs. 

When two consonants come together at the begin- 
ning of a syllable, as is sometimes the case in the 
beginning of a word, in consequence of prefixing 
prepositions or conjunctions not having a vowel ; and 
also in the middle of a word from inflexion; the 

former consonant will receive a vowel, for the most 



part "T, but also ; as, j/vun for 1'vua m 
heaven, }^i^for]l^the letter, tiL>L] for 2&404*fa 
was slain, ]fiu*o=*Z glory for l2u*=x*. This is analo- 

* <n 

gous to the Hebrew, where the former of two Shevas 
coining together in the beginning of a syllable, is 
generally changed into . 

Vowels are sometimes cast away: when another 
syllable is added to a word, the final vowel is cast 
away ; as, Zfjaa the feminine of *& he visited. But 
it is preserved, 1st. if a letter only be added; as, 
Zjns> thou hast visited : 2nd. *if the consonant from 
the analogy of the Hebrew ought to have a Dayesh 
forte; thus yL people; in the definite state l^L; 
3rd. the vowels ^ and * are preserved ; as, ^jo, 



Zekofo in nouns of the definite state, when it is 

c2 



20 TEE DIACBITIC POINTS, KTJSEOI AND IrtJKOK. 

followed- by o<n is, is changed into Pethocho, so Hint 

ii * * 
it may make a diphthong with o ; as, o<n fl^ w-#- 

lie is a liar, for 001 [1; cJoi lio-u<nt, thk to, i'w 



Transposition of vowels takes place, imperially in 
iiounsofone syllable; thus, ia^unw, delinite stale 
fp^; *ot> holiness, definite state )I;ao. Many oilier 

examples will be giycn in the Chapter on nouns. 

' * -i v * *ji ji t* 

The prepositions xoos and >ojao with the prefix 

V X *V f * 

Lomad become V^-pqS and >o t ^o^, and in (terhiin 
compounded particles a iransposition lakes phtee; JIN 
for jlc^ until. 



6. The Diacritia Point*, Kutlun tw<f 

The Syrians have no marks exactly 
to the Dagesh forte and liaphe of the Jloluwn; hut 
they use a point for the letters taaa^, 

This point, when it is situated ahoyo a lotlcr, 
away the aspiration, and, when placcxi l)olo\v y 
it. In the former case it is called ~.4w AW/w, whicsh 
signifies hardening, and in tlie latter yvo> liitkok, 
softening. In Manuscripts tluise poinis arc made 
with red ink. 

Kushoi is used with the above-mentioned letters, 
when any one of them begins a word; an (p ww, 
l^a^ man. But if one of the letttsrs & $ o ^ l,t- 
prefixed, then the radical te&^z receives a Itukok ; 
as, foi, 



THE DIACRITIC POINTS, KTJSHOI AND RTJKOK. 21 

If one of the letters 1 o * precedes one of the 

=>> the latter takes the sign Eukok; as, $ 

* 
I a creature; \^*. **-*> I chosen. 

^ X 

If the first letter of the noun be without a vowel, 

* 

then the second will receive a Eukok ; as, ]&!. break- 



The o of tel father, according to Sciadrensis, has 
a Eukok when a natural father, but a Kushoi when 
a spiritual father is meant. See his Grammar, p. 1^. 

Of those nouns having T to the first letter, and 
consisting of four letters, the third takes a Kushoi; as, 
*|5o** sin, l&o a house; if, however, the noun be 
feminine, then the third letter receives Rukok ; as, 
]2p a daughter, Ifticf a female slave,, ] AJ-^ a garden. 

If the noun consist of five letters, the third has a 
Kushoi, and the fourth a Eukok ; as, Uasoa a star, 
]\s&& a queen, IOJA a generation. There are, 
however, a few which take a Eukok on the third, 
and a Kushoi on the fourth; as, II?-\^D a teacher, 
1/fd an ape, \L^^o a walk, or path, fiua^io an 
edition. 

Again, with respect to nouns, consisting of six 
letters, the third takes Kushoi, but the fourth and 
fifth Eukok; as, ILyXo candle, 



* In this and the following remarks, when a Kushoi or Eukok 
is spoken of as attached to a letter, a ZvstSf^ letter is always 
meant. 



22 THE DIA.CEITIC POINTS, KTJSEOI AND ETTKOK. 

ftejoi knowledge. A few nouns receive Kushoi in 
the fifth ; as, ]ftaio/ adcKtioti, ]i*s&i clothing. 

If 7 be placed to the second letter of a noun, 
then the third letter, if it possesses a vowel, will 
take Kushoi; as, ]?* new, l^a splendour, &e. But 
if the letter which follows 7 be without a vowel, then 
the one after this will receive Rukok; as, It-p , 

lird, iLaoIa revenge, Jftiaco foolish. Pour, however, 

* t> 
have a Kushoi on the fourth letter, via. 

folmd, 1^4 heifer, 1^ Imping, and 
chariot. 

The letter after % if it be without a vowel, re- 
ceives a Rukok; as ]i^ a finger, 11^5 a ,/{*>/, ]j?l 
<?ar 9 )^1 wisdom. There axe a few exception**, 
which are mentioned by Sciadrensis. 

When nouns consist of four letters, the first having 
*, the third will take Rukok; ar, ]^a^o a wonl t 
l^u> a wwg. Exceptions are ]** darkness, 

a hole, lij^ evening, 1'LsJ ornament, iL&J hair, 
pitch, 

If the vowel * be placed on the second loiter of 
a noun, then the third letter, if it have a vowel, re- 
ceives a Kushoi; but if it bo quiescent, then it takes 
Eukok; also, if after this there comes another letter, 
it receives Kushoi; as, ]is^a vme, 
]&^it aplmt, ^^a phlegm, )is^ 

A letter, which comes after ', whether it, has a 



THE DIACRITIC POINTS, KUSHOI AND ETJKOK, 23 

vowel or not, always takes Kukok; as, ffJm victory 

X p 9 ^^ * 

]t+=& work, It-ioi^ a disciple; but if another letter 

comes between, then the haoy^a receives Kushoi- 
. , . * 

as, (fljfa just, ]Zf a congregation. 

If a letter of a noun take *, then the following 
one, whether with or without a vowel, has Eukok- 

0000 ' 

as \n4 good, \*i\Ji t uit. 

The letter of a noun which comes after the vowel 
*, if it be itself without a vowel, receives a Rukok ; 
as, Itacu beauty, ]&o=> first-born; but if the said letter 
has a vowel, then the point attached to it f s Kushoi 

O X * 

as, K*|as a coat* 

A letter elided, as there is no compensation by 
Dagesh, the elision is indicated by Kushoi; as in verbs, 

// // Af x ^ 

<-a, -*3 and o^ and their derivatives; as, <omaZ for 
^amaaZ ye will slay. 

These points serve to distinguish several words 
which have the same letters and vowels; as, fpaj 
disgrace has * hard, and l^ou pity has > soft ; fzojl 
# heap of corn has j hard, and Uo^ yoy has ^ soft. 
This is also the case with verbs in many instances ; 
as, OT fj^ lie drew him, with ^soft and ? hard, is dis- 
tinguished from 01^ he struck him, with hard and 
> soft. 

In many words, which, have been imported into the 
Syriac from the Greek or some foreign language, the 
aspirated letters arc accustomed to bo pronounced in 



24 THE DIACBITIC POINT, BI15UL 

the same way as they are in that language from which 
they are derived; as, diuicliL, %\a/*&, uao^olz, 
fleoxAyo?, it&x&t Xajwnfe: v of the Greeks is in Syrian 

a 

represented by *s> and by ^a; T by ^, by 4 5 
by o, x by ca ; and f hy unb ; as, 

ccocuumicuLa Philoxenus, uao^la 



a * , 

According to Amira and other native grammarians, 
KusM never douhlcs a letter; but on the other Imml 
it must he said that the Eastern Syrians in Ih'm 
respect followed the analogy of the Eelnw. W<5 
have also *Pa/3fll 9 Master, John iii. 2, and iji Uu 
writings of St. Paul wo have 'Apfa Jfittliw. 11* tins 
duplication bo not admitted, then it is important to 
state that in such cases where it would bo implied, 
the preceding vowel will complete the syllable; thus, 
pZ tab-bar or la-bar. 

7. Ribul 

Many nouns and verbs have the same form hi 
both numbers. In such cases it was found nccxwnary 
to employ some mark of distinction, Jb^or this purpoHu 
Grammarians have invented the sign JtUwi (^c&t) 
consisting of two horizontal* dots (") plactwl almvo 
the word to denote the plural numboi 1 . The following 
words will illustrate the use of this sign. 



Ribui is usually placed obliquely ia ii ami Sfc; thuit, 



THE DIACBITIC POINTS, UIBTJI 25 



5oo, JSfta booh. 

7 

wu covered, -^V| wwe cowraZ, (phi. fern.) 

.. 7 

he arrived, ^c ttwj arrived, (plu. fern.) 



A plural noun ending in ^ or <JL has no need 
of the sign Eibui; since the number is already ra- 
dicated by the termination, but still the sign is often 
added. 

It is sometimes used with a noun of multitude ; as, 

00 Of 

l& a flock of sheep, to distinguish it from jok a sheey, 
If the word taking Bibui haye the letter Bish, one 
of the points commonly coalesces with the point 
belonging to Bish; as, ]^ a Jierd, |pl met*. In 
MSB., however, we also find Ip^or lt^ 

It sometimes coalesces with the vowel Pethocho 3 
when it is expressed by points, thus, Moioi&l&i hisfom- 

7 ? * 

dalions for ^TLQD|^. 

Prepositions with pronominal affixes referring to 
plural nouns receive these points ; as, ^001^ , ^-01^. 
To this rule there are some exceptions ; as, >oja and 
^i, which are never seen with this sign. 

The numerals, according to some grammarians, do 
not receive the dots except when they are joined 

m qO *, 7 > V 6 

to pronominal affixes; as, <-*>^, |^Z, ^oau?, ^iu^z m. 



26 LINES, 

Besides the name v*o3$, wliicli is given to those 
points, they are also called by native grammarians, 
l^lo positions, Jso^ drops, &c. 

8. Lines. 

A small line is sometimes found above and somo- 

* 

times beneath a letter of a word. 

It is found above, a letter principally in the follow- 
ing instances, 

1. In abbreviated words ; as, *o for \L*tQ holy> 

I V * 

01 for ojoi that is. 

2. When letters are used to express numbers ; 

as, s^ 13. 

3. In the Particle of Exclamation of 1 to 
distinguish it from the particle o] or. 

When it is found beneath a letter, it directs that 
such letter is not to be read, and is therefore gone- 
rally called the Imea occultms. Thus, -ip Balk not 
barth, a dmghter. It is found, 

(1) In nouns with the middle radical doubled; 

07 n y 

as, lii& manna, {& a hill, |.^s uutions. 

(2) With Olaph in the beginning of a \vord 
in several instances; as, J*\ a mint, &**] 

9* * * * 

mother^ Uf*) laslf especially in tin* pronoun 
W, as often as it is used in the place of the 
substantive verb ; as, ft & / 



LINES. 27 

(3) "With. Ddlath when it is without a vowel 
before Thau ; as, liyl* new. 

(4) With He in the following cases, 

(a) In affixes ; as u*qirnSsn his kings, ^a^o 
he called Jmn. 

(b) In the verb loci was, when it is redundant 3 
or when it assists in forming the imperfect 

O 9 

and pluperfect tenses; as, |oci ^cnoZu] he 
was, ]o<n yna he was ordering )ooi |09 
he had ordered. But when it is used in the 
sense of to be, to exist) the line is not 
found. 

(c) In the pronouns 001 and -oi, when they 

are put for the logical copula ; as, 001 ** t mn 
my body it is. 

(d) In some words which are derived from the 

Greek and Hebrew; as, -^cooTi jRome, 
,, * 
}^o(7u a Jew. 

(e) In the verb ^<ju he gave. 

(5) With ** in ^i**, when it comes after the 
active participle used as a present tense; 

7*0 

as, ,-x^ ^s 9 we create. 

(6) With Lomad in some forms of the verb 

^ll he went; as, l\\ she went, i$^}\* they 

<i ~ * 

will go. 

(7) With Nun in the four pronouns k/1 <^te], 



28 LINES. 

^al, and in some nouns; as, 



the ship. 

(8) Bish in <p a daughter, and 4>*for 4**9 ? 
a < 



When a lino is found under u letter in a verb 
of the imperative mood of a passive conjugation, ii. 
implies that such letter is deprived of its vowel ; n f 

ethkatl 



9. Marhetono an 

In many words, when two lottors (^o 
each without a vowel, a lino is placed Hcnmlinu*N 
above and sometimes below the first of tluwn I pliers. 
In the former case it is eallod J&xrlwfottu (U^oif&e 
making to run> from ^<yi5 fc r), and in tlio latlor 
MeJwffyono (\L^mxi) according to Amim front ^-n 
to meditate; but according to Jlolfnmn and others 
from the Arab, U* to connect ; for th hvo Id few ly 
this sign are connected and Tnik<^ a HyllnbJ^, Th(*so 
lines seem to bo used only in certain words, ntid in 
the first instance for purposes of poetry. Tint pnH ry 
of the Syrians, as appears from tlui Kpocinions \\hla\i 
remain, (see for instance tho hyinn of JSphrnhn,) con- 
sisted in having a certain number of Hyllablos in 
line ; and hence it would bo convenient, i u many WHOM, 
to give to some words an additional yllabl<f, To in* 



MARHETONO AND MEEAGYONO. 29 

dicate this addition, a line was put "beneath the first 
of the two letters without a vowel, which had the force 

generally of Bevotso, hut occasionally of Pethocho ; 

. * * . * 0.* $ * * 

as, ]hQ\ i.e. l^v* a ring; ]&Xo i.e. ]J^^> fear. 

When this additional syllable is in such words not 
required to complete the measure, the Marhetono is 
written, and denotes that its letter and the following 
haye no vowels. It corresponds to the Sheva in 
Hebrew, except that the latter is employed according 
to general rules, whilst the former is used only in par- 
ticular words, and in these words only under certain 
circumstances. Grammarians, however, aie'not fully 
agreed as to the primary use and signification of these 
lines, and it is not now of much consequence, if we 
cannot make ourselves folly acquainted with them. 
It is supposed, by some persons, that the Mehagyono 
is found only when the following letter is > ^ ^ >o ^; 
but to these, others add 01, others -*, and others 
* o ). Again, whether every word which has one 
line, must, in a different situation, have the other; 
or whether some words have only one of the lines 
and others only the other, it is impossible to say, 
and happily it is not important to determine, Who- 
ever is curious to know more of this subject, may 
have his curiosity satisfied by consulting the chapter 
on these lines in the Syriac Grainmar of Sciadrensis, 
in p. 



30 OTHER DIACRITIC POINTS. 



10. Other Diacritic Points. 

It has boon stated, in pngc 10, thai- n point \ins 
sometimes used which, by its position either abov*' or 
below the word, would dotormiuo the true pronuncia- 
tion and meaning; when "without it and without Ihe 
vowel points, it would ho amWgomtH: thus, <*& for 
(ni> to Jim; ou* for oiJL to li<n\ It is also frequently 

A 

used as a note of Interrogation, Exelnwation, Admira- 
tion, Command, &a ]?or a further aceounl of this 
various offices which this j>oi)il performs, m\\ the 
Appendix. 

There are also certain signs for marking ihn wul of 
a sentence, and subdividing it into clause**, of which 
the following axe tho principol, 

(1) At the end of a section or parajjnijjh are 
found four points (*) or (;:), 

(2) Two points placed obliquely from the ritfht. 
hand towards the left, finish a elfins, 
and are equivalent to our colon; UIUH, 

:)4i^^ ^0^4, ^y l^a ^ When- Jt>Hit% MM 
the multitudes. 

These points are sometimes put UM a Hij^n of 
interrogation or exclamation, 

(3) Two points placed obliquely from the Ml 
hand to the right, thus (*), Kplit the 



PRONUNCIATION OF CERTAIN LETTERS. 31 

into different members, and are equivalent 
to our comma or semicolon. They are fre- 
quently placed perpendicularly (:). 
-r written wider the last letter of a word 
is the shortest pause, viz. a comma; as, |]]. 
These points are sometimes found after a 
long interrogation, see Matt. xii, 10. 

(4) One point frequently ends a period. 

11. On the Pronunciation of certain Letters when they are 
under peculiar circumstances. 


These letters are differently pronounced in different 

situations. Olaph is pronounced as Tud, 

(1) When it is preceded by another Olaph ; as, 



(2) When it is followed by another Olaph with- 
out a vowel; as, )jLo m* lay o, fulness. 

(3) When it is the second letter of the participle 
peal; as, ^ tso-yem, fasting. 

Vau is pronounced as v when it begins a word or 
syllable; as, o 00, o ve, o vi: in other places it has 

* x 

the sound of u or w. 

Tud in the beginning of a word with the vowel 
1 is not pronounced. It preserves only the sound of 
its vowel; as, JM* Inek> he sucked ; v^ Hwr* he was 

*x x 

heavy. Hence we find that before a Yud of that kind 
Olaph is sometimes placed, and the vowel belonging 



32 ACCENT. 

to theYud is transferred to llw Olajih; ilius, 1^ ;i 

liand, from the Hebrew T, is written W- \\V Ias<* 

* i 

also ]-<pA glory, liaicul r%, &c. Tlio promnu'iutiim 
of either word is the same* 

1 when followed by a loiter with link ok, or l>y o 
either with a Eukok or Kiushoi, is pronouum! liki* 

9 +> 

d&; as, Uy^geatho, wool; li **A0 f //<' MMtiiwwL 
Some persons add that 1 is o pronounced wln*n vj 
comes after it; as, Isuoj ^Aj/b, rr #m#. ^o wlirn 
followed hy one of the loiters o, >^ * is 

like i; as; Ifisu clwsdJiOi mewy ; J^\ f/tf/t, //<> 
plied. If z with a Bukok coin iii'tcr ^ or u& 9 rat'h of 
these letters has the force of o ; as 



12. 

Grammarians have given a fw ruf<\s for 
the Accent, 

1. In words of two syllables, if tlm lirsf 
terminate in a consonant without a vowl, this SN II;u 
ble has the accent; ?is, \ltel ythu-#/Wt <'/"<"// ///// l^r\. 
gdtvno, tone. 

2. If on the contrary the iiuul Ictlor of tint uonl 
be without a vowel, then the oum&t is pnf on (iu 
second syUable; as, ^ i~l6d, ho faynt; ^ jw-M, 
conmmdwff. If oach syllable bo formal in thai, 
manner, still the second is aflbctal with llu* 



METHOD OF EXPRESSING NTJMBEBS. 33 

7 

as, Zfaa pek-ddth, she has visited. The accent is also 
placed on the second syllable in nouns ending in 
o; as, aa.Vf>. 

3. In words consisting of more than two syllables, 
the accent is generally placed on the penultimate; 

.* ? o e> , 

as, lA-u^a po-rdch-to, bird; ]2L^oa)^o me-khul-to 9 meat; 

,* * * * 

|Zau^o mart-yo-nu-tho, admonition. 

13. The Method of expressing Numbers. 

It is found in Syriac writings that numerals are 
more frequently expressed by the letters of the 
alphabet than by numeral nouns.* In Section 1 
the numerical^ power of each letter is given. It 
will be seen by reference to the table exhibiting the 
forms &c. of the letters, that the first nine numerals 
are represented by the first nine letters, and the 
decads, I. e. the numerals 10, 20, 30, &c. to 90, by 
the nine following letters, viz. those from ^ to ^. 
The remaining four letters *o, 5, -*, Z, represent 
respectively 100, 200, 300, and 400. The Hebrews 
use the final letters for expressing 500, 600, &c., to 
900. The Syrians, however, employ a different 
notation. They put a point over a letter representing 
a dccad, viz. 10, 20, &c, and the effect of this point 
is to multiply the numerical power of the letter over 

* I have been informed by Dr, W. Wright^ that in the MSS. of the 
British Museum, down to about the ninth or tenth century, a series 
of arithmetical figures is employed to express the numerals. 

D 



34 METHOD OP EXVKKSSlXd NTMIUMSS. 

which it is placed by 10. Honor U = 100, & !>oo, 
&o. Hence also <J = 500, *s> = 000, '*, 700, 
us = 800 and j = 900. 

In order to express thousands, nn oblique lino is 
drawn under a letter from the loft hand tounrcls tin 1 
right. The number of units, which the, Jotter denotes, 
will, with the said line under this loiter, show the 
number of thousands : we havo, therefore, 1 1000, 
o - 2000, sv = 3000, * - HOOO, ^ 0000, 

\ ^ \ v 

Ac. 

Letters having a horizontal lino subjoined, n^rrscnl 
tens of thousands, i.e. this lino donates ihnt th 
number indicated by this lector is <o bo multiplied 
by 10,000. Hence, 

1 = 10,000, J3 = 20,000, feo c^ M 00,000, *** . ll*0,00i, 

jp ca 200,000, ^ 300,000, ys * 400,000, ^ -s ,VKi,0(t< . . . 

, 000,000, faOBs 1,000,000, 5 M 2,000,000. &?. . . , Z . ^O/IO^MH), 
o . w 

Decads of millions are expressed by moans of two 
oblique lines placed under a letter; thus, ) -10,000,000, 
o = 20,000,000, s, - 30,000,000 T . . . . ^ 

-V > ^V 

3,000,000,000, / 4,000,000,000. 
*\ 

fractions are roprcsentod by means of an obliqitr* 
lino drawn from the loft hand lo the* rijjh< f pliiood 
over a letter; as,o^ J, ^- J, i |, _^' fiftf ^c, 

In the composition of units, decads, liiuulrcdH, &., 
the letter which exhibits tbe groats immlxtr is 
placed on the right band; that which KfnmlH for llm 



HEADING EXERCISES. 35 

less number on the left; as, ^o = 43, ^ = 351, 
oaa] = 1866. Both in MSS. and printed Looks it is 
usual to draw a horizontal line over letters expressing 
a numeral, to indicate the purpose for which the said 
letters are employed ; as, Ia = 72. 



14. Reading Exercises. 
MATTH VI. 913. 






^* p eve # * 5 v P 

J> N^^L^D JA^3 ^D ^3 Pf pOkCd^ ^^Z )JO 



TAe same in ErtgU&h Characters. 

A-bun d'vash-ma-yo neth-ka-dash sh'moc, Ti-the 
mal-ctl-thoo neh-ve tsev-yo-noc ai-ca-no dVash-ma-yo 
oph-bar-o. Hav-lan lach-mo d'stm-ko-nanyau-mo-jio. 
Vash-buk Ian chau-bain ai-ca-no doph ch'nan sh'vakn 
Tcha-yo-vain. V'lo tha-lan Tnes-yu-nd, e-16 pa-tson 
men b5-sho me-tul d'dl-loc hi mal-cu-tho v'chai-16 
v j thesh-buch-to Tolam '61-mIn. 

LUKE XXII. 63 65, 



0001 A=^O ^>aA^ ooai 



77 f*tf 7 

-^ 0001 M^CO . cn-i 0091 



o ocai 



30 HEADING EXISKC1SKX. 

TIte same m English Character*. 

Tgav-re da-chi-dm van 1'yc-slui in'-vax-cliin vnti 
beh, yam-clia-pon hvau loh. Viiio-clu'u, IIVHU 
let 'al a-pau vom-rin cth-im-lK") jna-nu in'choc. Varii- 
ron-yo-tho sa-gi-yo-ilio m'gad-plu hvau 
'a-lau. 



NOUNS, 



15, THE simplest forms of nonus arc those which 
consist oiily of the letters composing the root ; as, 
r&D king, woj sacrifice. Such words arc evidently 
in their primitive state, 

The augmented forms consist of the root aug. 
mcniecl by one or more of the letters ) o ** >o j z, 

which to assist (ho memory may "be called 

* * 
Thus, **DD <(% altar from <-MS? sacrifice; 

diMiple from ^^ lie adhered to, followed. 

Those letters are probably al)l)rcviations of words, 
and the signification of them qualifies that of the 
]>rimitivo word to which tlioy are united, 

Nouns having (~) with the first radical, and (ol) 
with the socond, are generally nouns signifying 
persons; aa, I^OM; & friend; whilst those having (ol( 
with tho first radical, or ending in o , ZoJL, J/oJl, are 
ufalraot nww8 s as, ji>o0 holiness, ]iQ^s^9trenffth. 

Two words are sometimes compounded in sense ; 
aa, |k zp a word. Sometimes tho two ^ords ara 

00 

joined l.ogether ; as, PO^D lord of enmity, i o. m 
eMMy. A great number of compound words occurring 
in Scripture may be found by referring to the Lexicoa^ 



38 NOUSS. 

of Soliaaf and Castell under tho words fcl, 



16. G'w/cr. 

Tliore are two genders, tlie masculine and feminine. 
Of the masculine are, 

(1) The names of men and their office's ; as, 
cttosai IiitAC) lu> JJW'W?, Iflq uiMUWtt* 

(2) Names of nations, rivers, and mountains; 

V i' N 

as, ^13 Canaan, ^i^ou Jorflmt. 

Of the feminhie lyendor are tho nsimoH ofwomni, 
the offices of women, islnndn, cities, and names of 
the double members of tlio human "body, 

The feminine gender of nouns is also known by 

the termination. These terminations an? ), o, ** Z; 
as, V*a* praise, o=u^ goodness, <-^oZ coiifiwuM, tilo 

(t. J! 

aj9er^. The nouns not ending? with any ol'ihe for*-. 
going letters, and not included in the {>rwedin> 
paragraph, are generally masculine. 

Nouns consisting of two HyllaLloH, and beginning 
with a >o, if the first of those BylhibUw liav v , then 
in becoming feminine they add another ' to the lt 
which is next but one before i j as, t'lVs 
iLlLo Inffh, Vlal&o fom. iLnliSo pmiw<l t )ap^ feuu 

tf V 7 , 

]Zup^ blessed. 

Nouns which begin and end vvifh Xekolb, 
which consist of four loiters, when they 



NOUXS. 39 

nine, take Revotso upon the second letter, provided 

that one of the letters is not a guttural ; as, ]^1 a 

9 * p 

father^ fern. \L t ^+ a mother. But if the noun contain 
a guttural letter, then the Revotso is changed into 

Pethocho; as, ]t+ fern. ]^^ an acquaintance, l^aL 

9 7 * 
fem. Upii> passing. 

Nouns which begin with Zekofo and terminate in 
U 3 when they bocome feminine take Chevotso upon 

the second letter; as, l-'oi fem. |2uol worthy ', |lj? 

* * x 

fem. 12u?J flowing. 

X 

But if they begin with Pethocho and end in }I, 
when they become feminine they take Ohevotso upon 
the second letter and cast away the Pethooho from 
the first; as, lln^fem. \&A^elected. 

Nouns ending with Zekofo only, and having Pe- 
thocho on the first letter, when they become femi- 
nine change the Pethocho from the first letter to the 
second; as, 1^** fem. Ut 2 ** companion, il^o king, 
fem Ifl.-Asn queen, and a few others do not observe 
this rule. 

The feminine gender of adjectives is derived from 
the masculine by the addition of | to the end of 
the latter; thus, la^ good from ^ masc. Those 
ending in *-* quiescent convert it into *^ moveable; 
as, -{ pure, fem. 



Some adjectives insert Yud immediately before the fem. 
termination; as, 5^ small, fem. jlja^] . Adjectives in ^ 



NOUNS, 



seem always to insert **; as, ]l^ol spiritual, from 

9 7 0*7 

masc. _^ZA^ obedient, fern, ]* 



Tliere are masc. nouns of tlic clef, stale in ]Z, when Z irf one 

* 

of the radical letters of the noun; as, ]2Ua icw ]lu] o//rr. On 

the other hand there are some nouns with a masv. omlhy in the 
def, state, which are either fern., or common ; as, fcll **//>, 

\l>o] way, lit'i* sword. 
Some nouns are used in both genders, and arc ihwvlln> 

termed common; such as, |ili^ to0z^ \i& ffowrf, l*AiCA 

* 

5M7?, &C. 

The rules for distinguishing gondor are for tint i<>sl jmrf tlw 
same as in Hebrew. The sixmo words, wluiu occturrin^ in iMtlli, 
have the same gondor; an, 1BD and t aa A0/% 0^ uiul y>cu 

rfa^ are maac. ; yi^ sind ^>) car///, tfM anl ^lc*4 A^/> r 
fern. 

Words derived from tho Greek do not ohwnu tlu* fore- 
going rules, but generally retain their own guilder, a>, 
y, fom. 



17. Nwubvr* 

There are two numbers, tlio singular and th<> 
plural.* Masculine iiouus mako tho plural number, 

V V 

1st. by adding ^ to tho singular; an, p^w<M 9 r-p^ 
0M0&; 2nd. words cndiug in p or w f throw \v t v t!w 

1- or i-- and add tho termination ,j ; aw, $4 buy, 

t * . * 

i plu. ^aaic reprobated 



* There ure throe cxotnpk'H of tlm iluul ntiuiluT, vi/, ^ 

V V * 

fern, ^Zj^, ulw> ^*t\te and *5*ic>, 



NOTTNS. 41 

Nouns of the fern, gender form the phiral by 

changing the termination 1- into 5-, o and l into 

* . * 

<p, and - into ^*; as, U-am sfej?, v i>w 0/iyw; aioj 

* * * * P7 

similitude, ^cto similitudes ; 2u2e portion, I&&Q por- 
tions; ^35 wt#y, in the plural <-*3>'. 

Nouns which terminate in UQ , when they become 
plural, change x into placed on the Yau; as, 

9 * 06*. 

I^os5 multitude, plu. jzasy multitudes. A few nouns 
besides the take 7 on the second letter ; as, UoS^ 
plu. l^oi^ prayers; ]ofu Aip, plu, Uo^.. Others, 
instead of f take * upon the first letter;* as, lloij 
likeness, plu. I^Q^DJ . 
Nouns consisting of three, four, and five syllables, 

and terminating in |flu, change the *-> s into t* when 

* * * 

they become plural; as, IZUD* w^w^y, plu. ]ka>*. 

Nouns which have 7 on the first letter and end 
with Yud and Aleph with the vowel p , and which 
consist of four letters, in the plural transfer 7 from 
the first to the second letter; as, \*sL elect, plu. 



Nouns having * on the first letter and ending with 
}*, in the plural receive the vowel f upon the letter 
immediately preceding.-; thus, ]lf^ Lord, plu, jl^s. 

Those nouns which commence with a Mem and 
have v either upon the first or second radical, in the 
plural receive 7 on the letter immediately preceding 
Yud ; as, C^m^ reprobated, plu. 



42 NOUNS. 

Feminine nouns consisting of throe, four, and 
five letters, which end in L and have * upon th 
letter before Tud, in the plural add another * lo the 

" * . . 7 1 it*.** * 

Tud; thus, I2ui**o> spiritual, plu. |ki-*c. 

There are many other changes of vowels which 
nouns undergo in passing from the sing, to (ho plu., 
which will be more particularly noticed in treating on 
the const, and def. states. 

Some feminine nouns terminating in U, insert *-* 
in the plu. between the root and termination; UN, 
]ls>09 place, plu. liuaoj; ]1>&\ WUttt, }>lu lfiu>'c&]. 
Other nouns in the masc. or [ton. gender insert o ; 

e f o 9 'i o t> 

as, (his a companion, plu. Uoi3; |iicof < ////##, plti. 
jzoicl, There are nouns in which ci IH hiHorlcd in 
like manner; as, W mother, plu. llonicf; ]&!&) wfW 
servant, plu. ltoS|. 

' Many Syriac uouns liave the masculine form in the sin^. find < 
the fern, in tiio plural; as, ]&] physician, plu. #orc|; iZj ^/flrr, 

v ,7 7* * *V* 

plu. ^oi'Zj; *^a3oa wrowe, plu. ^ooijoo. 

There arc others wliich have the fern, form in tlio ing. mid 
masc. in the plural; as, |i] 0/^ plu. ^-Ac]' 
Jro] ; ]Lic/ tor, plu. ^ic, ; \^ talent, plu. 
year, plu. ^14. 

Nouns compounded of two words sometime admit a |thmil 
in the former; as, ), 4.1 1*3 sons of man or mm; s<tnu*tiuicH 

in the latter; as, ]a:n t !^s.a enemies; and AomotiuKV in 

<> P * ' * 

as, m&ia (d ail g^tors of word), uvrdt. 



NOUNS. 43 

Some nouns are found in the plural form only; as, ]'*\ 
heavens, j^ life, \^ water. 

Some nouns have a double form, one masc. and the other 
fern. ; as, o] father, plu. ^oo] and ^ro| . 

There are nouns, which admit in the plu. two forms; but in 
a different sense; as, \lc] maid, plu. "jZoi^DJ; but when jiicj 
signifies a cubit, the plu. is ]i|. 

There are other nouns which are very irregular; as, 
nation, plu. <oiol, jko house, ^Jio; p son, 
Zp daughter, ^i5; )kl swter, ]ii;f; ]JUp ^%; jIjQo, &c. 

~ X 

Many words of a Greek origin retain the Greek termination 
in the plural; as, }i^ SfyfAa, plu. l/l&o^o/ SoyfMra. 

Others terminate in *&o], joo, us], orua, resembling the 
termination 09 of the Greek accusative plural; as, 

^uid^fcrj, plu. ijoaa-fclu^ SiaBrjica?, &c.; or in o_, uaol., 
corresponding to OA, ot9, so oiaaojoZS], op^oSofoi; ooo t 4JQfls, 
?; or in uo*_. corresponding to t?; as, 



18. States of Noms. 

To the absolute and constructive states of nouns, 
which the Hebrews have, the Syrians add a third, 
the Definite, or, as it has been more generally called, 
the Xhnphatic. This is indicated by the termination, 
and is equivalent in general to the article n before 
a Hebrew noun. It happens however that the primary 
signification of this state has been departed from in 
many instances, and nouns are found in the de state 



44 STATES OF 3IASCVLIXH NOCKS, 

when only an indef. sense is intended to bo expressed. 
The rules for passing from one state to another depend 
either upon the gender, the number, or i ho fi nal let t er, 
or on more than one of those. Thirst for 

19. Masculine Nouns, 

In the singular number the absolute and construc- 
tive states are the same. 

The definite state is obtained by iho addition of 
f to the end of the absolute). Hence I In 1 deimife 
state of masculine nouns and the absolute sfnfe cif 
feminine -nouns have the same form. 

Those nouns ending in |~- in tho absolute stilly in 

the definite the 1 is changed into ]1. 

The constructive state, plural munber, is formed by 
changing the termination^- of the absolute into *JL 
and ^*- into *++ . 

The del plu, is formed from the absolute by <ln lin- 
ing the termination ^^- into | and <-* inlojll. This 
* * * 

and the preceding rules will bo illustrated ly 
examples^ which will presently follow. 

The object of the mnniiulcT of the station \\i\\ 
to ascertain the clumgcs of vowels whirh 
undergo in tl\eir dilleront Htatos of both numbers; 
or, which is tho samcs thing, givcm th^ aim. stnle sini?. 
num. to find tho vowels and their position in lint 
constr. and def. states for both numbers 

1st, If a word consist of three consonant.* with a 
vowel on the second consonant, which m the ease u hit 



STATES OE MASCULINE NOTTOS, 45 

a very large class of nouns, this form is equivalent to 
one of the old forms of segolate nouns in Hebrew. In 

Syriac these forms are, i. ^la the alternate form of 

* " 

which is x>.^lo or ^^lo . 11. ^-^lo alt. ^^Lo or ^.^lo . 

in. ^0^.0 alt. ^.^Qa . Now whenever the noun in its 
primitive form receives a syllabic argument, the alter- 
nate form is used; thus, p^ttuw, def. 1r=^- We 
have therefore only to add the proper termination to 
the alternate form to obtain the def. state sing, or 
the abs. const, and def. states plural. Thus, 

Singular. 

l)cf. Aba. and Oonsti 

a 7 7 

morning 1 
6oo 2 

servant 3 
wing 4 

captive 5 

body, 6 

>* 

Plural 

Eef. Conetr. AT 

V 77 7 

mornings 1 



servants 3 

captives 5 
6 



46 STATES OF MASCULINE NO CNN. 

1. In the foregoing examples, that which is marked ( t) com- 
prehends all those nouns having v on the socond cunvuiimt, 
and remitting it to the first in the process of inflexion; such mv 

7 

C9 beard. 



2. In the second example, we Imvc those nouns which <ak< 
in the second consonant, but in inflexion it in chan^nl to * 

and remitted to the first. The trutli w, the vowel * m the proper 
vowel in both places, and the reason of the chants is, (hut, in such 
nouns the last letter is a guttural or Rish. 

3. In the third example arc included those nouns wliosi- forms 
are ^lo and ^,^la; such are ^io kiity, 

husband, Js^ anathema, ^ASU soul. 



4. The fourth example belongs to that class of timms 
forms are Vta and 



5. Nouns having the third radical Oluph, take tho 
which are exhibited in the example ]n\y but (L. 

* *Vi 

]ffla covered, have their definite forma ji^. and ]*i*l, f^j? ami 

lima. P^ 56^, makes in tho dcf. phi. {^^ , us if from tlu 

*> 

obsolete form -^Ji wehavelikewi.se | f hpA- as If from 



6. All nouns of the forms ^oLo and 



la 

T v * f 

0^4, cMf* month) p*u, and the like, niav 

njt K * 

be considered as belonging to tho same chws of mmtiH us 
p^. The Yud has Chevotto, because thi letter i MIVIT ' 
without a vowel when it begins a word. If th<i tofc 
nant be a guttural or Rish, it is preceded by tho vowul 
thocho instead of Revotw; as, w^ month t ^.^ A0tfrn 



STATES OF MASCTJLINE NOUNS. 4? 

Such, nouns as ^ eye, >oo* day, also correspond to 
the Hebrew segolate nouns. In these the vowel is 
changed into * in the def. state sing., and all the 
states plu., and this new vowel makes a diphthong 
with o or u*; thus, 



!> f. Ab. and Constr. 



day. 
Plural. 

Consti. Abs. 

7V T 

^<-S eyes. 



2nd. Other classes of nouns are the following. 

1. Such nouns as admit no change of vowels in 
inflexion] thus, 

Singular, 

Drf Abt. and Constr 

evil 



Def. Consti. 



The vowel Z^q/b is immutable, and therefore monosyllables 
with this vowel are represented by WAO ; as, oka look. Nouns 



48 STATES OF MASCULINE NOUNS. 

having two or more syllables, if the penultimate terminate in n 
consonant, or if the ultimate syllable be perfect uilluuit the 
terminating consonant, also belong to this clans ; UN w*l^*l& 
explanation ^o^Z disciple. Some nouns wanting mi aWluti* 
state may be referred to it ; as, |L] the stay, }1>] //?< /W, }*G* 
the $erpent,]Lti death, Johco winter, ]ic, cMrmutintti for the 
form of the definite state remains in all the part* of their inflexion. 
Finally, nouns which possess either of tins fullimin;; Uu-im 
preserve their vowels immutable, vi/s. ^a^^ tiff. |*l*^ t \^, 
^**^Lo def. IL^LO. A few nouns appear to eonvsjiond with flu 1 

X X 

segolate nouns in Hebrew, but which roally belong to thi< i-fa ; ; 
as, ^X* carcase, jti] small, uk.O*0 (t 



2. Monosyllables, the vowol of whIHi is or , n<i 
nouns of many sylkl)lo, tlin last of wliich is 
are exemplified in the following Tablo. 



PI 



STATES OF FEMININE NOUNS. 49 

The noun p son, makes in the plural N ^ sons ; as if it were 
derived from a different root. Also ^cu is peculiar in receiving 
the consonant 01 in the plural ; thus, yv> ftj 



3. Nouns of more than one syllable, terminating 
in Olaph or Yud, may constitute another class. Such 
are, 

Singular. 

Def. Abs and Constr. 



Plural, 

Def. Constr, Abs. 



A few nouns double the last letter in the plural ; 
but the linea occultam is placed under the first of 
the two letters ; thus, ya* sea, plu. ^.VNi., fcoicu . 

77 

jsnVis, plu. of y* people, is another instance. 

20. States of Feminine Nouns. 

In the singular number, the constructive state 
changes f of the absolute into 2 1.; thus, \L*yewr 9 Z\l*. 

Nouns Which in the absolute state terminate in 

o or , in the constructive end in o or &*; as, &] 
* * 

victory, constr. Zoai ; v*s> wntry, constr. HUai. 

* a* W * 

E 



50 STATES OF FEMININE NOTTNS. 

Tern, nouns having a masc. termination ; ns, 
belly, and those ending in L JL j as, && 
make the abs. and constr. states the sumo. 

The definite state of fern, noons which liavo a 
masc. termination is the same as that of mnsc. nouns ; 

P 7 

as, jop belly, def, top. 

Inthedef. state the f of the al>s. i olian# l <l info 
)i; as, PIO w^ 3 def. fa^io. 

If the word in the abs. state tovniinafo in U, ilu^ 
Tud becomes qnioscetit in tlio def. stole, and Jin 1 
preceding 'consonant takes"; if lh torminaiiou in 
the abs. be ]o, then Van becomos <iuiosconl in ' in lit" 
def. Ex. 4, 5. 

Nouns ending in o .1 or ** 7 malco tho d( k f. l)y the 
addition of U; those ending in z_ add only }, in ili<* 
def. Ex. 6, *!, 8, 9. 

To avoid tho concourse of sorcm! consonanls 
without a Towel, or, winch is the sanw (Iiiny, (o 
facilitate the pronunciation, a vovrol, nitnu'Iy v rr ', 
is placed with tho second or third radical ; us, |li>| 
widow, def. lalisj. 

Nouns ending in ^L ijj the alw. ninNc 1 ., in i-hr* Hi-P. 
state fern, assume * under tho Nun, which JH 
by 1&*; as, ^o-^o dof. fern, ]Lii**'^D w 
See p. 40. 

In tho plural number tho confiir, siato in dor! veil 



STATES OF FBMINIHE NOUNS. 53 

from the abs. by changing the final l into z. and 
the def. 1S derived from the abs. by changing v into 

The Examples in the folloTraig Table *m fl^er 
illustrate what has been here said on the states of 
Jtena. nouns. 

Singular. 





* * * * 

JiuiP 



Oonstr. 



3 
2 



52 STATES OF FEMININE NOUNS, 



ff -7 * -V 



In No. 1, we have an example of those nouns imlhi# in 1 
whiclmnclergo no change of vowels in thoir iliflbwif hfatos; Mi'-h 



are, 

2. Nouns which assume an additional vow<*I \\\ tlw? <luf* st 
singular. 

3. This example represents nouns in which tho v<*wi'l on 
the 1st rad. of the -abs, sing, is removed to tho i2iul nul itt 
the def. They partake of tho oharac,tor of segoluto iuw in 
Hehrew. 

4. 5. In these examples wo have nouns whose ffrmiwitiotiM 
are jl and ]o . A few nouns belonging to the latter <*a*t 

the vowel of the 1st, rad in tho def, Htato niu#. ; nn, 
def* 



6. This is an example of nouns ending in o , which 
their vowels unchanged, and in which no new vowel is hitnirlutun I ; 
as, o$V l*b&rly, O^OA equality, 



7. Nouns represented by o^a are mich a rniv< 
vowel in the plu. vk.^ or*, which is placed on tiro 
as, CLCM prophecy, o^a military 



CASES OF NOUNS. 53 

8. This is the model of nouns the abs. state of which ends in 
In the plural Yud quiescent is changed into Tud moveable. 

X 

9. In the nouns represented by Aoio we have in the plural iL 
taken away and o moveable placed before die plural termination ; 
such are, flj^ sacrifice, u*tt ablution. 

In some instances the penultimate letter is written twice in the 
plural ; as, |L bride, plu. x - 



There are some anomalies; as, ]~->+^ praise, 
in the def. ; f 2u* sister, plu, def, fzL] . 



21. The Syrians have no oases which are marked 
by terminations ; tut the nominative and oblique 
cases of the Greeks and Latins are known by the 
context, or are expressed by the constructive state, 
by the influence of a transitive verb, or by some par- 
ticle ; as, o 9 o ^ ^1 lok ^ , &o. preceding ; thus, 



words of God; or, ]a Pio words of 
God. 

to Jesus, |^.m\ to the 



,-4* ^<? have seen Ms fflory, 
God loved the world. Sometimes we see &* in imita- 
tion of the Hebrew n% ; e. g. Gen. i, 1. 

o] ! woman. See also Acts i, 1. 






ADJECTIVES. 

with the king, &c. 

If one of the letters o ? o \ be prefixed to a noun, 
the first radical of which is 1 or -* , then the prefix 
receives the vowel which the 1 or ** previously had ; 

Pf 0V070 _ * 

as, M $ brother, lp, M? lt*^* *00, l^-^s, | r *-^*? . 

" 'ix 'as a ac 

When one of these letters is prefixed to a word 
consisting of three letters, and especially to those 
which end in two Olaphs, it takes the vowel ; as, 
jfccs with i hundred, Ifcco and a hundred. But this 
rule is not always observed in words, which are not 
composed- of three letters and do not terminate in two 
Olaphs. 

Again, should two or more of the letters ^> o > o 
be placed before any word, # the first of these pre- 
fixes be without a vowel the second will have one ; 
also, the third will be without, and the fourth with a 
vowel, as we see, for instance, in the noun )&& a 
word; for we say llu^co, iLVtaai f^is^ and 



Adjectives. 

22. The Syriac adjectives are few, but this delect 
is supplied by other words, which when placed in cer- 
tain positions obtain the use and signification of adjec- 
tives. Tor instance, the state of construction will 
supply the force of an adjective; as, }!>*> hL^o city 
of holiness, i.e. holy city, Matth. iv. 5. Also *a sub- 



ADJECTIVES. 55 



stantive put absolutely with > prefixed; as, 

* O 7 

a natural body, ***oh f^> a spiritual body, 1 Cor. 
xv. 44 Also in other ways ; as, the fire, ]&*> $> 
which is not extinguished, i.e. inextinguishable; ^ojcn 

' 7 7 . TO 

***** ,0 ariAsij <p<yiik u*o* ^)> 7^ /0 ^0? he shewed 
himself alive, lit. (as living). 

Adjectives arc distinguished by gender, number 
and states, ^ which are the same as in substantives. 
It is only necessary to notice that in adjectives the 
masc. def., and the fern. abs. have the same form; 
but they are easily known the one from the* other by 
the substantive or the verb with which they are con- 
nected. 

The degrees of comparison are not to be found 
in a change of the adjective, but are merely marked 
by certain particles and connections. 

The comparative is expressed by the positive con- 
strued with ^o either preceding or following it ; as, 

* V A 

001 o$ ^,s> <-So he is greater than all ; there is some- 
times added ^ well, very, or t*iu mwh, very ; as, 

*, 90x? 0PV 

ciiscaa ^>L> Ifcaaco ^o ^4 M**f*o and sharper than 

a two-edged sword, lit. very much sharper, &c. Blessed 

1 2 v 

is he who ffi&es <^3su> (x*] ^o ^2u more than he 

*. m, X 

who receives. The comparative is sometimes marked 

0V 77 

by the sc&so of the passage only ; as, 1^ ]O<TU ]***& 
P * j * * 

]>oiV"^ the elder shall be servant to the yowiyer. 

The superlative is often formed by the duplication 



56 NUMERALS. 



of the positive; as, ^-^ <%ssAo least; sometimes 

by adding the particle *=4 #0^ which is equivalent 
to the part. "N? of the Hebrews; as, ^ ]*2a worst, 

* ' T 

7 7 7 7 

plu.; sometimes again by i-K^o mtch; as, U^^u^o *-^o 
most honoured; or by ^ prefixed to the plural; as, 
b\sm ]V$3 mall among twffs, i.e. the least ofkmys; 

or as, UM^AJ <pai>Q^i feostf o/ ^ Apostles, literally, 

* z 
least of those who (we) the Apostles ; or it is ex- 

pressed in the following manner; whosoever therefore 
shall break one frol] ^tri l^oa ^o of these least 
commandments, Matth. v. 19. See also two other 
places in this verse. 

Many adjectives are formed by the addition of U 
to the words from which they are derived; thus, 
UiflAa^ corporeal, jlio^ momtcmow, \4^z> primi- 
tive. So also adjectives having a Greek origin ; as, 
l*pp tarb&row, jlJj] aerial. In some instances the 
termination \i is added to the primitive word to form 
the adjective; as, IIA-J primary, Ijj^m hairy, 
proper, ]&>] terrestial; or,tal; as, 

V 00 

5) earthly, \+^+> proper. 



23. Numerals. 
Numerals are either cardinal (l^Uis), or ordinal 



NUMERALS. 57 

Ordinal. Cardinal. 

Fern. Mw. Jem. Has. 

B P P 7 .PP 7 

ft** fi* Ofttf 

Constr. Oonatr. 

T ." * 77 7 7 

jZ |u3Z second 
tUrd 



, IL*-] or ]ix* sw; 



PP 

ninth 



Prom ten to twenty the numbers one, two, &c. axe 
prefixed to ten, in the following manner : 

Cardinal. 



Fern. Uaso. 

t 7 



eleven 
twelve 



58 NUMERALS. 

Fom. Masc 



ifl&LaJi t^^'l f urtee ' 

'* * * 7 /./ 

fifteen 



7 7 V 7 

seventeen 



7 7 f> 9 7 9 

ifflSftil^P/ *fpVi*sa/ tiightWl 

7 V 77 

wwaoto, 



dewntk 



Ordinal 

Fern. Maw. 

007 P 7 



thirteenth, 
&c. &c. 

The law for deriving them from the cardinal is sufficiently 
obvious. 

Cardinal numbers from three are for the most part joined to the 
thing numbered by Apposition either in the absolute state ; as, 

707 ' ..> 7 

^Mtf* psjj four months, or the del.; as, ]2C^z |Aiccu three 

X 

days. But the constructive state is occasionally used ; thus in Matt. 

<( 7 

iVi 25, we have |ft i ->|S" /tfliV ^n cities 3 literally ^ a dscctidaof Gities* 

i 
These numbers are frequently found to occupy the place of 

ordinals. In Luke i. 59, we have LolcZj Jico* ///<? c/a^ ?^/Wi 
(is) eight, i. e. ^ eighth day, - x ^ ^ **'a;^A /iowr. (Sco 
Syntax.) 



NUMEBALS. 59 

Denary numbers from 20 to 90 are expressed in the plural, 
and are of the common gender ; thus, ^mk twenty , ^ti^L 

V y * * 9 * 

thirty, ^3',] forty, ^^Lcu* fifty, ^Zu, sixty, ^a A seventy, 

* * * * * 

<--oiZ or ^jj^cZ eighty, ^2. ninety. 

The ordinals are derived from these by adding the termination 

\+ for the masculine, and ]u for the feminine ; as, masc, 

i> 00 

fem. 2uio^ twentieth. 



The remaining numerals are, }\& a hundred, ^^o two 
hundred, ||^oLS^ three hundred, <fec., which are formed by pre- 
fixing the less number of the feminine gender before ^]&. PIu. 
llo^o hundreds. Also, w^ 9 or ^^ a, tftousand, def. foj^ 
plu. ^g^j or |lsu^; os5 ten thousand, plu. ^oa'/. 

Z 1 

Twice, thrice, Ac. are expressed by cardinals, with the noun 
jj time, after them; as, ^aj | once, lit, one time; 

yO 

#rice; -^l 2^^, thrice; 

Words denoting a part of the wliole are, JlO^oZ a J/wrcZ jjcri, 
> a fourth part, ^^v a ien^/*, &c. 

Multiples, as double, treble, &c. are expressed by ^ and a 
cardinal number following with *s prefixed, or sometimes without 
it; as, ]^">t"> t^* seven f^> Kt one in or into seven, ^ ^ 
double. 

i 7 

The days of the week are, |a,A3 ^ fast day of the week, 
Sunday; f-^ ^*5^ second day, Monday ; PAD l^Z Tuesday; 
]"*-* jLai] Wednesday; ISAD U^u* Thursday. But Friday 
is )oo*pt, and Saturday, 



PKONOTOS. 



24. PRONOUNS are sometimes separable, i. e. they 
consist of words, and sometimes mepwdble, i. e. they 
are expressed by certain particles called affixes placed 
at the end of nouns, verbs, or other particles, The 
following is a table of the personal pronouns. 



.Plural. 

Fem. Com. Masc* 



Singular. 

Pern. Com. Masc. 



We 
You 



i 1st person. 



001 

? 

001 



v e 

ooi and i-oi are also used for the demonstrative 
pronouns; as, 001 ]y3^hatman 9 ^01 |l&j| thatwomm. 
They are not often employed as substantive verbs ; 
although they are occasionally so used in conjunction 
with particles. (See 1 Cor. iv. 7, and elsewhere.) 
They are met with to give emphasis or confirmation 
to a sentence. Eoffinan in his Grammar cites an 
instance from Ephraim Syrus, T. I. p. 122 D, and he 



DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 61 

adds : uU plwra hujus generis invenies. Amira states 
in Ms Grammar that the Maronites translate oji and 
*-*oi by i/p8) ipsa, and 001 and ~oi by ille, ilia. 

^ and ^1 are used indifferently in the oldest 
MSS. In later ones we find ,-L*, and occasionally 
<-i~(. In the latest, only ^L* . 

ip] and ^1 are for the most part found after a 

transitive verb; as, <al oS^o <QJOI tliey have filled 
them, John ii. 9. 

25. The Demonstrative Pronouns. 



?<"( 

. p ( tkis > fem - fl \ ^ ^, masc. 

]><j\ or Ijci ) 



tot f 

^ > this, 

MOT) 

{*^ 
oa<n these, 

^Jdi these, 



, raasc, 



fern. 

These become reflexive by being joined to the 
personal pronouns ; as, 01 001 he himself, l*oi **& she 
herself. 

In the Theophania of Eusebius, we have yMci and 

*jj 

y^oi for ^uai and ^^01. 

IJOT and IJCT coalesce with 001 and *-oi s and then we 

7J " 

have the following compounds, QJOI <Aw >, masc. l^oi 
u*gi ttw ^ fern. 
jj^i with the 01 expunged seems to be used as a 



62 RELATIVE AOT INTEHEOGATIVE PRONOUNS. 



suffix to the noun >ocu : thus, U^&* this day, or 
to-day. See Mark xiv. 30, and elsewhere. 

<oi of which tf<n may be regarded as the definite 
form is occasionally found; as, |ato* *+> <oi, fait this 
suspicion. Ephraim T. I. p. 370. In Assem. Biblioth. 
Orient. T. III. p. 75, line 4, <<n is found between the 
substantive and the adjective. Again, the fern, joi is 



also met with ; as in Ephraim T. III. p. 590, joo in 



The demonstrative pronouns in the plural number, 

x a * o * > 

viz. ^ojcri jind ^01 , etymologists derive from M^ tM&. 
These pronouns are also found performing the office 
of personal pronouns. (See p. 60.) 

26. The Relative and Interrogative Pronouns.. 

The relative is > of both genders and numbers, and 
is prefixed to words. It is the same as the JSthiopic 
H, which in Hebrew has the same use and signification 
as IKftj or ^f. 

In the Jerusalem lectionary -? is found as a 
relative according to the Ohaldee. 
The interrogatives are, 
of the person ^io who f 
of the thing ji, ^, ]ii, <o>, ^ what f 
^& is of both genders and numbers. ^vp is compounded of 

7 .* 77" V 

^o and 001 ; as, ^aiail^ cu -ul2 01^0 who kath opened 
his eyes ? lit who is he, who hath opened for him his eyes ? Wo 
have also Q*^n what is it ? for coi 



AFFIXES. 68 

Intorrogativos of both person and thing arc M 
masc. lj*l fern, who, which, what? of the sing. numb, 
and ^J\, who, which, what ? of the plural 

The particle ** is not unfrequently found with an 
interrogative pronoun. See Matth* xviii. 1. ; Luke i. 
66 ; John vii. 35, &c. Schaaf says, "particular hujus 
usus frequens est ininterrogationibus, et valet id quod 
apud Graecos apa" 

UJ, )t*), <-JL] have sometimes the force of the 
Latin gualis, lohat sort fyc. ; as, lf^ }L]a zcith what 
body f L e. with what sort of body ? 1 Oor. x^. 35. 

poa compounded of o and fa expresses how great ? 
or how many ? equivalent to the Latin qi^ntus ? or 
quot ? See Matth. vi. 23 ; xv, 34, &c. 

When s is used with these interrogatives, they 
become relatives ; as, ^1^ P> ^ Tie who enteretli not, 
John x. 1. 

Care must be taken not to confound ^o with tlie preposition 
^io. Before the use of vowels, flie former word was written ^o, 

with a point above the ao, and the latter ^p, with a point below it. 

The Greek particle ^5, /t& is also written ^ib. The context 
of course shows whether this or the pronoun is intended. 

27. The following Table exhibits what are called 
pronominal affixes^ which are added to the end of 
nouns. They are certain abbreviated terminations or 
inseparable particles, and have the signification of 
possessive nouns. 



AFFIXES. 

Singular. 

* com gender, my *-* com * gender, 

masc. thy y- tnasc. 

fern. thy 

masc. his 

fern. Iwr 

com. our 



' 


masc. 


his 


ul 


fern. 


her 


r 


com. 


a. 


00 


masc. 


your 


*a 


fern. 


yow 


X 






)01 


masc. 


their 


kOl 


fern. 


tfieir. 



masc. 

fem. their 



28. There are separate possessive pronouns. 
They are expressed by the letters ^j compounded of 

*+9 which, the older form of j, Chald. ^ and ^> to. 

* 
These are put before the affixes ; thus, 

thy, masc ; >nSi? z^/w, fern. ; oil^^ 

* K <*> X X 

ow^ <oa!^j your, masc. ^^S.; yoe^,, fern. ; 

* * i 

their, masc. ; ^oi-^j their, fern. 

Distributive pronouns are expressed by M, 
and the preposition ^o ; sometimes the substantive 

* In the Jerusalem Leotiouary we find y*o used for the affix of the 
3rd pers. sing. masc. to a phi. noun. 



is taken away and the distributive pronoun is in- 
dicated by ^o only (perhaps ^ was originally a noun 

denoting &parf) ; thus, ^oauio r ^\ some of them, or 
^ocmSio some of them ; also by . 41 I^T> or V V>^*> tokosoever, 
pol^a or ^o f SnSn whatsoever. The latter pronoun is 

composed of ^ all, and ya^ something, or wy A{ftyr. 
Other pronouns are formed by adding the affixes 

9V 0* 

to the nouns \+su soul or person, and j^coio substance 

or person; as, ^aa l^a MZ?^ thyself; OIASJ <^IM ^jlo 

* " 
wd Ae went, Mnged himself ; oiiooios A himself. 

See also John vi. 53. 

29. Nouns with Affixes. 

We come now to nouns with affixes. The vowel 
changes of nouns receiving the affixes in Hebrew are 
many and complicated; but in Syriac are few and 
simple. The following is an example of a masculine 
noun, which is first put in the definite state and 
then takes the affixes in the place of the termina- 
tion 1 

Singular. 

Def, State. l^i ti*ff 

1st. pers. sing. com. **:& w# *M,<r 

2nd. masc. 



66 NOUNS WITH APPIXES. 



fern. 

3rd masc. 

7 
3rd fern. oia!^> her - 

7.7 

1st. pers. plu. com. v n^to our , 

X 7 

2nd masc. t^"^ >-^ your 

2nd. *. fom. ^ T ^V.vn your . 

3rd masc. 

3rd fern. 



PluraL 

7 7 

1st. pers. sing. com. "iSsSf? my Mng* 

2nd. masc. ^-^vn thy ... 

' . ' 
2nd. . . . fein. - ^^.^x.y^ thy . . . 

3rd. . . . masc. 

3rd fern. 

1st. pers. plu. com. .^^r> our . . . 

2nd. .. . masc. ^.^^^y> your .. 

7 v. * 
2nd. **..** fern. '^'^^S" your . . 

* * , * 
3rd. masc, ^pm*J&o their... 

3rd ,.... fern. 



NOUNS WITH AFFIXES. 



1. The word i.aVfl is pronounced 3falk 9 the *.* 
being otiose. 

2. Nouns in the singular number the definite 
state of which terminates in ]1 9 form the affix of the 
first person singular in ***, and the second and third 

persons plural in <o^_, ^a , ^oou_, <^fft*_; thus, 

\^4 boy, *~^4 my boy, <Q=U^ your boy, <piA/ 
their boy. 

3. Such nouns as terminate in- and the letter 
immediately before Tud having a vowel, frhen they 
take the affixes the 1 is removed, another ^ is added 
in the plural, and the first Yud changes its vowel to 
Pethocho ; as, \*lz> an architect, plu. V^. With 
affixes we have ^is, ^*ia. 

4. Those nouns having the abs. state like ^pia, and 
the definite like jjou> , retain the m with the affixes 
of the first person sing, and second and third persons 
plu. ; as, ^J<na my priest. Again, those in the abs. 
state having the vowel 7 on the last syllable, and 
any other vowel on the preceding syllable, the ' is 
preserved with the affixes of the above-mentioned 

' 7 ' ' 1. * 7 7 

persons; as, ***=>& altar, * <n|Sp my altar, ^-r*c 
yow altar, &c, 

5. There are some nouns, namely, monosyllables, 
which have the vowel * in the abs. state, and which 
lose it in the definite. Such nouns preserve the * 



68 NOUNS WITH AFFIXES. 

with the affixes of the above-mentioned persons ; as, 
yo> def. fay blood, **&> my Hood. 

The nouns like fl^^o^o speech, and jl^LSsD shade, 
which haye the linea occultans under the first Lomad, 
when they take the affixes, the linea occultans is 
removed, and the Lomad receives 7 ; as, 



Lord, is not found with any pronominal affix. 
The reason is, that under such circumstance, the 
noun )fi is used in its place ; thus, **D my Lord, 
ypD thy 'Lord, <n& his Lord, &c. 

Three nouns, namely, |a| father, |lf brother, JLOu father-in- 
law, take the affixes in an irregular manner. 


1st pers. sing. com. -^l my father 

2nd masc. yOZij thy . ... 

* i 

2nd fern. t*oo3J thy 

" ? 
31x1 masc. ^102] his 

3rd fern. cios] her 

*? 
1st. pers. plu. com. ^oa| our 

* *7 

2nd masc. ^aaaa] your 

* v 

2nd fern, ^aas| yew 

3** maso. ^poioa] their 

3rd fern. ^OIQS} their .... 

The other two nouns take the affixes in the same way, 



NOUNS WITH AFFIXES. (jj) 



except that jio* makes ^SQ~ zy father-in-law* See obs. 

4, p. 46. 

7 ,* * A * - 

p, |p, sow, has **p my &on> ^osp yor MR, <pcnp their 

son, &c. 

30. In feminine nouns the same affixes are used 
for both numbers ; namely, those which are annexed 
to the singular number of masculine nouns. They are 
put to the end of feminine nouns in the constructive 
state in the first person singular, and in the second 
and third persons plural, and at the end of their 
definite state in the other parts, the termination 1 
haying been taken away. The reason of this differ- 
ence is, that as to the pronominal affixes mentioned, 
if they were placed to the definite state of the noun, 
there would be a concourse of several consonants 
without a vowel. 

The following is an example of feminine nouns 
with affixes. 

Singular. 

7 77 * 7 

abs. Pft family, const. &Sf* def. |AJ3ft 

7 7 

1st. pers. sing. com. ^kDf4, m V family 



2nd ............ masc. y2o^k thy ...... 

7 



2nd. ............ fern. t 1* 

3rd ............ masc. oifio*^ ?n$ ...... 



70 NOUNS WITH AFFIXES. 

) 7 

3rd ............. fem. aitojA her family 

7 

1st. pers. plu. com. ^2i3^ our ...... 



* 7 S 

2nd ............. masc. ^oata}* your 

7 7* 

2nd. . . fern. ^a^i* your 

n 7 7 

3rd ...... masc. 

7 7 

3id. . . . fern. oiZOf* tlmr ...... 



fl 7 



Plural 



1st perM. slug, com mkSfA. way families 

7 

2nd ............ masc. 



fl 7 



2nd. . . fern, t^o^OyA. thy ...... 

ir\ 

o 7 



his 



ft O 7 

3rd. . fem. 



1st. pers. plu. com. 

jiiid. .... maso. 

2nd. . fern. 

3rd. . . . wftsc. 

31 ........ fern. 



7 O 7 



Up with the affix w transfers the 7 from the first 
to the foUowing letter; thus, ^p my daughter; but 
it remains in the others;" as, x p thy daughter, <o^p 
ywr daughter. 



NUMERALS AND PARTICLES WITH AFFIXES. 71 
31 Numerals and Particles with affixes. 

Numerals receive the affixes of masculine nouns 
in the plural number; thus, <p0u? these two, 
masc,, ^autfi these two, fern., {pauZL^i these three, 

*7fl7 * 7 7 

masc,, <paute*s;| these four, ^oauLiiflM these five, 

X 7J * 7 7 * -3 9 9 

l these six, <pau2^a* these seven, <p<rujjicz 

pou&^4i totf ame, tpouijffl^ these ten. 

* * 

When the singular affixes ajre annexed, they have 
the power of possessive pronouns, and contain there- 
fore another signification, ]?or example, fftZyx& his 

7 * 7 * 

ten, ^{mi> % fe, ^ooiZ^ their ten; and we find 
very frequently in the New Testament *2y&l his 
twelve, speaking of the twelve disciples of Christ, 
A great number of particles take the affixes ; as, 

* . 

CD in to in me, ? in thee; to, ^^ to you; ^o 

X * 

from, ouia from him, ^ from m; itos after, 
^ooiilcco e*/^ them, &c. Some particles take the 

7 * 

affixes of masc, nouns plu. ; as, y>f before, -^t 
me, ^^ &<jfor<? #/^; so likewise ^ oor 
**& for, mlead of, ^ besides, near, and 

others. 



VERBS. 



32. IN Syriac, as in Hebrew, the root of the 
rerb is the 3rd. pers, sing. numb, masculine gender 
of the first conjugation. Most of the roots are 
triliteral, a few are quadrilateral. The triliteral 
roots have a vowel under the second letter, and 
make only one syllable. 

The different forms of the verb, which express 
various modifications of the original sense, are usually 
called conjugations. They amount to eight, of which 
four have an active, and four a passive, and some- 
times a reciprocal signification. They derive their 
names from the verb ^a, and are contained in the 
following table, from which the characteristic of each 
conjugation may be observed. 

Act. Pass. 

1 Peal ^>la 2 Ithpeel 



3 Pael \ 4. Ityaal 

5 Aphel \s>] 6 EfktapM 

m 

7 Shapfal \zL 8* Mtaphal 

The Peal conjugation is the same as the Kal of the 
Hebrews ; that is, it expresses the verb in its simplest 
form and meaning. 



VERBS. 73 

All the passive conjugations are formed by prefix- 
ing 4 to the corresponding active conjugation. The 
1 of the Aphel is changed into L in its passive, and the 
ut of Shaphel is transposed with z in the EshtapheL 

The Ethpeel is, 1st, the passive of the Peal conju- 
gation; as, ^4-04 lie was slain, 2nd, It is reflexive; 
as, >04>zteo exalteth itself. (2 Cor. x. 5.) 3rd, In in- 
transitive verbs, the Ethpeel has sometimes the same 
signification as Peal, e.g. Us and -aa4, as may be 

seen in SchaaPs Lexicon under IAS, 4th, It is, ac- 
cording to Hoffman (Gram. p. 178), in intransitive 
and obsolete verbs, sometimes the pass, of Aphel ; as, 
^^1 lie was commended from ^m he conmended.* 
Pael is the Piel of the Hebrew ; when the signifi- 
cation of the Peal conjugation is intransitive, the Pael 
makes it transitive ; as, ow] it wasjwt m fitting, Pael 

J3*1 fa justified : sometimes it expresses the Peal sense 

tf. 

with greater energy ; as, ^l* he asked, Pa. he asked 
often or diligently. This conjugation has' a causative 

7 7 

sense in some verbs ; as, <pi he bought, ^p\ he corned 

* 

to tw/, i.e. he sold. To the Pael is sometimes assigned 
the sense of comnwidwg, permitting and declaring 
what is expressed by the Peal. 

Ethpaal is the passive of the preceding conjuga- 
tion. As the Pael, in many instances, signifies to 

* I think this last use of the Ethpeel rests on no certain foundation. 



74 VE3LBS. 

make or ccwse to do whatever is indicated by the Peal, 
the Ethpaal will necessarily signify to be made to do 
that which is denoted by the Peal; and hence it is 
that the Peal and Ethpaal conjugations in some verbs 
possess nearly the same meaning ; as, WOAA* he thought , 
uHmZ| he was made to think, i.e. he thought, o^ 
lie drew near, Ethpaal, he was made to draw near, i.e. 
Tie drew near. 

Aphel corresponds to the Hiphil of the Hebrew. 
In sense it is usually causative of Peal ; as, & he 
remembered, Aph. &>] he caused to be remembered, 
he commemorated. It is also found to possess the sig- 
nification of desiring, permitting, declarmg, exhibiting, 
&c. whatever is indicated by the Peal; as, *4^*I 
he permitted or grmted power. In occasional in- 
stances, the Pael and Aphel are found to have the 
same signification : as, ^? and ^1>1 . The charac- 
teristic of Aphel is 1 prefixed to the root. 

The preceding conjugations are of very frequent use, and 
are acknowledged by all Grammarians. Those which follow 
are of much rarer occurrence. " 

The Ethtaphal is the passive of the preceding con- 
jugation. It is formed from the Aphel by prefixing 
the particle z| , and changing the Olaph, the charac- 
teristic of the Aphel conjugation, into Thau. Examples 
of this form are seldom found. See Mark xiii. 24 
(Philox. vers.) the sm yl*i&j shall be darkened We 
have also wuZ) from Izj. 



VERBS, 73 

The Sliapliel conjugation is generally considered to 
have the same signification as the Aphel; it is formed 
by prefixing ^ to the root, and like the Pael and 
Aphel takes * under the second radical instead of " . 
By many persons this conjugation has been referred 
to quadriliteral verbs ; but it is found so frequently 
much more so than the Ethtaphal that Michaelis 
and others have made it a separate conjugation of tri- 
literals. Examples are, t=&+ lie made or caused to 

serve, -DJU^A he inflamed, *^z he made perfect, 

t * 

. 7 77 

t*^&* lie consummated, *-*a*- lie promised,* ^3$+ he 

X X 

announced. 

Eshtaphal is the passive of the preceding conjuga- 
tion, and is formed from it by prefixing L\ , transposing 
the L with the .*, and changing * under the second 
radical into 7 . 

The EsJitGphal conjugation agrees in form with the tenth con- 
jugation of Arabic verbs. 

If the first radical of a verb be i, *&, ^ -*, it is 
transposed with L of the particle ^] in the Ethpeel and 
Ethpaal conjugations ; as, wo^M he was left, instead 

of uaatAZ] ; wu^tap] he was lifted up, instead of uoLco^l, 
After \, the L is changed into ? , and after ^ into - ; 
as, **29\] he was conquered, ^^^1 he icas crucified* 
Verbs are either regular or irregular. The former 
class includes all those verbs which preserve their 
radicals unchanged throughout all their inflexions, 



. 76 VEK03S. 

the latter those which lose or undergo a change of 
one or more radicals, 
There are two tenses, the prseterite and future. 

Their forms are ^4b and ^G^OJ, and these forms 

<n 

determine the past and future times more accurately 
than they do in Hebrew. The present tense may be 
expressed by the active participle with the aid of the 
personal pronouns, By means also of the auxiliary 
yerb two other tenses are defined ; namely, the im- 
perfect and pluperfect, of which some account will be 
afterwards given. 

Sciadrensis in his Gram. p. t ica writes on the tenses as 
follows; Aicja pc^o }jp <J*iStfj <QJ| |Du^Z OoZ 



. 

v p v f f \* y7 f 7 

fife \is]o >ota> U=1 t=^? U^l- Tenses also are three, 
which we number in the first mood; namely, the praterite, the 
present and the future. By the present tense he means the active 
participle with a personal pronoun, and there is no doubt that 
this combination is so often used for the purpose of representing 
a verb in the present tense, not only in the versions of the 
Scriptures, but also in Syriac writings of a later date, that a 
grammarian may with propriety, as Sciadrensis has done, give to 
this construction the name of a present tense, yo\>> ]ls]. In 
this respect the Syriac language is much more perfect than any 
of the others which belong to the Shemitic class. In Arabic the 

V S t 

tense which the grammarians designate c.U* resembling, viz, 

.*/<> *-' 

the form^ajb is very uncertain as to the time it is intended to 

mark. Sometimes, when accompanied by certain particles, such as 

* ^* 6' 

it expresses the future ; at other times when it is 



VERBS. 77 

* 
preceded by U ft h fts the force of the present ; but in numerous 

instances the context alone can determine the tense -which this 
form of the verb is designed to indicate. So likewise in JEthiopic 
there is so much indefiniteness on this point that Ludolph, in his 
JSthiopic Grammar, calls JETM1C tmpus contingent, which le 
ta-anslates/ac^or/aci^p, 43; and in p. 37 he instructs us in 
this tense as follows : " Contingens tarn Prsesens, quam Futurum 
Indicativi reprsesentat." 

Concerning the expression of the present tense, Hoflman says, 
in his Gram. p. 3S5,plerumque in Jmcjtnem part, uswrpatur? 

The different numbers, persons and genders are 
formed by prefixes and affixes joined to the root of 
the verb, as in the Hebrew. 

The imperative form is used in an affirmative 
sense. A negation or prohibition is expressed by the 
future tense and the particle P not, placed before it. 

The infinitive is in its nature an abstract noun, and 
as such receives the pronominal affixes. It has an 
active, neuter, or passive sense ; and when added to 
the verb will give intensity to the signification. 

33. Before we proceed to give the tables of the 
different classes of verbs, it is desirable to present the 
student with the tenses, &c. of the substantive verb 
]ooi he was, and of M &, which are peculiar in their 

z 

forms, and because the former is much used in the 
general conjugations. 



VERBS. 
Preterite Tense. 

Poison. 



Sing 


Nuinlioi. 


Qendei 


ZUooi 


I was 


com. 


7 

uo<n 


ihou wast 


masc. 


V 

v*2uooi 


tJiou wast 


fern. 


looi 


he was 


masc. 


Zoui 


she was 


fern. 


Plural Number 


7 






M*0(71 


we were 


com. 


* 7 






^p2u*ooi 


you were 


masc. 


7 






^ZUOOT 


you wew 


fern. 


7 






OO01 


they were 


masc 


^001 


ifiey were 


fern. 



Future. 

Peiion. Singalar. 

1 |ooi| / sAa^ or iviU "be com. 



2 IOOTZ t^ow sAo/f or wz# 6e masc. 

2 <-*ocnZ t^ow j/wt^ or w/^ 6<5 feni. 

AH (T' 

3 IOOTJ he shall or m^ be masc. 
3 ]ooiZ Ae *Aa2Z or will le fern* 



VEKBS. 



70 



Plmal 



*-ndcir 



1 

2 
o 

3 
3 



Person. 



|oou wf shall or will If corn. 

n * 

* 

ye dmll or will If inasc. 

ye slut?? or mil he fern. 

they shall or ZPS/^ 6e masc. 

or will le fern. 



to be 
Imperative. 

Singular 
u^OOl If thou 



Huial 



0001 



6e ye 



Present Tense. 

Singular, 
1 W lam 



031 



art 



* X XV 

3 cuooi or 001 oai he is 



maso 
fern, 

masc. 
fern. 

Gender 

com* 

maac. 

fern. 

masL-. 

fern. 



80 



Person 
1 



VERBS. 

Pluial. 

we are 
ye are 

ye are 
{0401 ^001 they are 
they are 



pep 



Qendci. 

com. 
maso, 

fern, 

masc. 

fern. 



Participle, 

Singulai. 


loai being or is 



or ^5 



Pluial. 



or are 



masc. 



fern. 



masc. 



. 
t-' ^S(poi 6a7i^r or ore fern. 

The personal pronouns are frequently used in the 
place of the substantive verb after a participle, by 
which means the present tense of verbs may be ex- 
pressed, as will be afterwards seen. We have also 
the personal pronoun in such an instance ; as, 001 <A^ 
lie is good. In these cases, ^ju] and ^1 are employed 

in preference to <aj<n and 



34, We come next to M is, which is the same as 

X 

the Hebrew #\ It takes the affixes in the following 
manner, 



VERBS. 81 



}" IM!, 



JHM M;, 



If to 2u1 \vilh HH iiflLves bo joined iho vorb ]c, the 

nwMvill bo forniod; ihns^luccj ^*Z 
, Joari ^m^L*] fit' twx. 



Thn vtH) ZJ si^nilirs //; ////^^vhcn it is followed 

i 

by Ismail uilh (lti fe . prohonnnnl allix( i s; ns, 



J'1'n 



ft 'tit. 



Tho ticguiivo ibrni is &, a contraction of P niul 

*l; wluttt it m joined with the pronominal affixes 


o 



VKIIBS. 

' 



wo obtain ilic following, 

we, Lc. / /"<' '<. A ^ '*"* *"*' H0t ' aurl S 
on for tlio oiliovs. Or l>y mnmxmtf ili'^ nflixcs io tl- 
have, -iui I *o ^^A /* w/ .//, 



we ff/ 
not, &c. 

85. Wo will now giro a paiwligm of V= i ils 
conjUKatioiiH, &o., as tin oxainplo of the iuil.jxi.iu of 
roitdai' vorlis in Amoral. 



CONJUGATION OF JIEGTJLAH VEKBS, 



Prrot.3. maw. 
3. fern. 
2. UWHC. 

2. ffiu. 

1. com. 
['In. 3, 11 11 we. 

3. fism. 

2. iiutHu. 
iZ, fouu 

1. com. 

Infitiitlu 1 . 
hiifur. JnuHC. 

fctti, 
P!ur. iniiHC. 

fdlll. 

i-~ - 
Kut, 3. mtwo, 

3. fern, 

2. muse. 
1 fnii. 

1. com, 
1'lur, 3. iMimc, 

tin fdfl, 

ii. TUIWU, 

2. IViu. 

Curl, act 
[t.'l;,,',, 



TllL'l. 



AM 



.,>.. 



EXAMPLE ^^10 he slew. 



85 



Aphol. Ethtaphal. Shnplid. Ealiiapluxl. 



fc ' 



9 * 

ZZl 



1 t> 



_ <T. V 

i * - r AQA 



SO IIKGUJUAJI VEU15S. 

IJ6. Obsmatnm on Hcynltir f 
The Pwterifa 

The first Idler of i he root is gouorally without a 
votvol, the second has for the most part ', Iwt somo- 
times it has % especially in intransitive verbs and 
vorlw denoting the affectioiiH, qualities, or sensations 
of llio mind ; as, ^<ro 1w mw/, ^cro 7^ 
WBS> /ftf 6'7(V/^r/, ^>> 7/ti A*/^/;/, S N^5 7/6* 
Atf ///// <//?w, ^A ///* htfntfj!lMl. Also y( k rl)s whoso 

rfuluttil isOlnph; as, ^.jl ///? /w/rr/, ^^o 7^cf 
/itwry. HonHM'( k rI)s I how arc whiHi admit both 
' and ' ; as, ct^ and *&*^ tw fax nt/wi ; hut in many 
of ih<\s* in,stan(MH a ditloronco of Ki;ni(i(*aiion is 
denoted; ilius, aectonlin^ lo CaHt(H's Lexicon by 
MiobactliM \M\ linvc ^.U /tPMtnlwl, and ^U lu'MHffhl. 
Those also whose first radieal in Yud have fV<*<ju(jntIy 

' undn' th( k Me< ( <Hul ; as, ja2U ///* M/. 

i 

The Van oflhc jnase- and Vud of the fejn. at lito 
ondofllui third person, plural number are somolimOH 
omitted, and thnvorh is wrilien '-\^j I fay *//*<?. Tbi 
in often t ho cm so iu (ho oldest, AIKS* The reason is 
that these, letters are, never pronounced. 

Nun panmoffio IH added in some jtiNlaiufn* liotli 
totbOTnaso. and fom. Bonders of 11m ihird person, 

plural numhtir, hut movo fn<ju(,ntly to tho latter} 

*. v *' 
as, ^CU^D! *>**&* ^^ r( ' F' rs *' 'u. muc, and fern- 



VE1U3S. 87 

The force of this particle is supposed to be that 
of giving energy or certamty to the expressions in 
which it is found to occur. 

The first person plural has frequently ,j instead of 
^1 at the end, as, ^L^O , ^^o), &c. 

Tho Ethpcel of the 3rd. pers. sing. fern, in some 
examples terminates in Tud ; as, ci&aoj M^Z] P his 
place was not known. Bar. Heb. Chron. 86. 5. Seo 
also 135. 5; 482. 8. 

A very few verbs are found to have Olaph pros- 

7 *> 

thetic ; as, v-*a*l he found, i*2U] he drank. 

I* X 

It will be observed by inspecting the Paradigm 
that the numbers and persons of this tense are formed 
by affixing a particle of one of the personal pronouns 
to the radical letters ; thus, ^okl^Lo for ^oftj 



The Future. 

This Tense sooms to bo formed in the active con- 
jugations by prefixing certain abbreviated forms of 
the personal pronouns to the imperative mood ; thus, 
for ^Q^U and W ; ^a$z for ^o^io and 



In the passive conjugations the same forms are 
used instead of ) of the particle zj . 

Verbs having * under the middle radical of the 
prorforito, in the future take 7 ; as, ^^1 ; a fow also 



88 UJBGITLAR VEliBS. 

* * * A"* 

liaveo; as, o^, OD^OJ; ^, ?Q*^* Those whoso 
third radical is a guttural or Hish take , A low 
verbs submit to no rule as to tho vowels which they 
receive ; thus, ^z] I will receive, which has tho saiuc 

vowels as the Ilcb, IBN, We have also ^s\ 



Tho second and third persons singular foxnimno 
sometimes admit Yud otiose or paragogic at the end ; 
thus, .*iA(fe and J^a^bz . 

The prutformalive letters are not four, as in lh*biv\v, 
namely, yrtf ; but only tlmo, namdy, ^j- r no third 
person sing, and plu. of both vendors iak< J, probably 
from iicn, or <acn instead of*-* an in JUrbrew. 

It is certainly somewhat remarkable that tlio prefix for tlio 
3rd, pen}, of the fui should be Nun, when in Hoi). un<l alwj In 
Chdd. Arab, and JKthiop, it SB Yticl. Tlie rhwiution of the 
Syristc in tliifi particular from the rost of the Hiu'iwlio lanp!;uft^8 
1ms been a piw/Jo to many, uml has frivtw rise to various (oti- 
jcctural explanations. Tho oni 1 , however, in which wans (irmuma* 
riuiw havo Hoenti'd ineliwwl to rt J*HO, is <his, vi/ that tlu k Nun 
was writt.cn for Yud by mistako. This opinion In cx|inAsmi s 
follows by lloilinan } but in \\hirl) this distin^ui.Mh^d linguist tlnci* 
not at all concur, " A'M pnxiiornt. 3 p^rsonat tmiltit* Hiis|n i r4niu 
fuit, quia in cognatis dinluctiH Yntluivon^batur.nt^nu! diibiturunt 
litterarnni Yud ot Nun, qum nano mint figura similliinn% in 
auxtlium vocarc punnutationoin f'acillinnim." Now ihi>, motto of 
fir Nun iiwUwl of Yd appears <^i mo in tin* hitfluwt 
hnprolmhlcr, imhiud alnioHt uI)Hur<l, sviicn wo conhitW that 
tlu; lan^ua^c was written and spokwi at flu* same litms 'Uid tltut 



REGULAR VERBS. 89 

Nun is so unlike Yud in pronunciation that it is nest to impos- 
sible one letter should bo mistaken for the other. Tt is better 
therefore that we should rest satisfied with the fact, that the fut. 
form of the 3rd. pers. is ^o^laj and not ^o^lo*, than to 
attempt to explain what, for want of data, is obviously inexplicable, 

An exception, however, to the use of the prefix Nun for the 
third pers. fut. exists in the Jerusalem Lcctionary. Thero, tho 
prefix is universally Yud, as in the other Shcmitic dialects. But 
the whole Lectionary, both in its structure and words, has a very 
strong Chaldaic complexion, and this circumstance may account 
for the exceptional usage. 

The verb .-m^ receives m, for * through the whole of tho 

IT. X 

Ethpeel conjugation, except tho infin., which is regular; thus, 
prat. dsua^Z], he obeyed or consented, impor. a2L*a^z|, part. 



Tho root dL3, used chiefly in the Apliol, is, in that conjugation, 
he exhorted* 



fafmilwe. 

The Infinitive of all the conjugations lias Mom 

prseformativo. Tho Poal is masculine, The others 

* 
have the termination o, and are feminine* 

Imperative. 

The observation on the vowel placed over Uie second 
radical of the future holds good in the imperative ; 
as, oaic> sleep ye, o^U atfk ye. In tho Ethpeel and 
Ethpaal conjugations tho middle radical has no vowel, 



90 UKGULAJl VKK1IM. 



and under it is placed llic Uuea OMwIluus. This peeu- 
luu'ity has probably arisen from the general practice 
of* pcoplo to utter a command in a hasty and an abrupt 
manner. 

Nun paragogic is somet imes found wiih the forms 
of the imper, in tho IVa-l, Pad and Aphcl conjuga- 
tions; as, ^o^o for 



Tho aclivo J*articiplo l\ k ,l hns ahvayw tho Ibrni 

^,4 without the Van, which is insrHcd in lite 



Jlolmnv ])nrti<n])inl noun KaL This cirrnunslanco 
ariwH from Vnu not bring used with Iho vo\v<*l **, lut 
with % On tho contrary, tho jmwivo pariutiplo has 
u* with tlio vowtJi '; as, ^^s^o. The. participles of 
all tho othor conjugations aro derived from llio pra> 
toriio hy prollxing M<m. Tin's lottcn 1 IH very probably 
a particle of tho pronoun ^si; o lhat ^4^0 iw //^' 
w/<o 9litydh 9 i.e. ow<f tt/tn/htff. In ilm passive and 
Aphel conju^ationH tho Olaph is otniiiedand Us vowd 
tal<ou l>y tho 'Mt k in f 
From tho last wmaHk must ho exempted some 

verbs of tho Aphcl conjugation, which ivfain th<? 

</ 

Olaph \vhon another lott(r i pr<j(ixe<l; a, 
pe.nniUiuy to live. Thin i>s also tho ntse in the 

Tho part. ^+o MimilmM tukos tho vowel ' on tho 
first rad., especially in IntruiiH, verbs; n 

ailvO I. 21. 



YB11BS. 91 



Occasionally the form ^S^LO has an active significa- 
tion; as, *WiA taking up, ^4 carrying, *+*] hold- 
ing, &G. 

The Olaph of the Aphel conjugation is changed 
in the Ethtaphal into L\ as, ^^oZteo for^.cJf* 
This is likewise true in the whole conjugation.. See 
p. 74 

37. The gutturals produce a few anomalies, and only a 
few; for the Syrians have not so great a variety of vowel 
changes as tiie Hebrews. Verbs, tiie third radical of which 
is at, WM, ^> or 3, havo in the future and imperative Poal for 
the most part the vowel v under tho middle radical. In the 
other conjugations and the active participle Peal, they have v iu 

^ ff 7V V V 

the place of*; as, w*-^o wor$Mjr>pi</ a , w ruSp glorying, I^D 
lie mocked, pj] he commemorated, p>Z], p^J. 

IK ir> 

In tho imperative of tho passive conjugations of verbs, which 
have a guttural for the third radical, the second radical receives 

V 7 <n V * 

a vowol; as, JpZ| for Jp4- 

In tho Jerusalem Loctionary the future and imperative Peal 
of verbs whose third radical is a guttural arc formed after the 
paradigm of the regular verb ; as, ^aiOA*, w*o&a*, &c. 

The verbs D he consoled, ]^l he dejihd, \L he polluted, 
and a few others in the Pael and Ethpaal conjugations, havo the 
same changes of the vowels as tho guttural verbs arc men- 
tioned in the preceding paragraph. 

38. The Present Tewe is formed by tho participles 
(form %M and the personal pronouns placed after 
them; thus, 



VJBRBS. 



i; M "M-s / 

7 I 

iu] ^*^ f/wt 



, 001 



I'lui.tl, 



r S M (.0 ffl* 



7/'/ 1 ff/r 
ttw fl 



The 1 ihird JXM I S. phi. is ^vnornlly < 4 .\ pressed simply 
by (.ho ad. part, in ihr plural nuntbci*. 

Tlui ]xu*K(>ual pronoun in ofu*n iound lHlon* UK woll 
a ttltor tho participle; a, W ^f W / jr/, (!in. xv. 2. 
wordH MoiuolimcH inb'rvotin b(twHn Ihc first 
ami iho pnrtutiph", as I*) /)io 1-to p }a| 
,/ ^/fc' without tikifrlwH. Alur Jacob's Scholiinn on I IHK 



IREEGUT/AR YEBBS. 93 

These auxiliary pronouns are sometimes contracted 
and affixed to the verb; as, &^Lo, ^zJL^b thouart 
slaymg, second pers. sing. maso. and fem. ^L^o 
for both genders in the first pers. plural. 

The substantive verb added to the participial form 

^u? will usually express the imperfect tense; as, 
r> p 
looi ^Lo lie was slaying. But if this verb be added 

to the prsBterite it will usually make the pluperfect 

a 7 

tense; as, locn ^^U> he had slain. 



Tho pluperfect tense will not always be determined 
in this manner; for it sometimes happens that the 
auxiliary verb is thus found with the praeterite, when 
the context will not permit it to signify the pluper- 
fect tonso. In such case the praoterito or imperfect 
tense will be expressed, and which of them the con- 
text will determine. 



IRREGULAR VERBS. 

39. LA&QE classes of verbs deviate from tho fore- 
going paradigm of ^^Lo, and present many irregu- 
larities in the process of conjugation. They are pro- 
duced by nearly the same causes as they are in 
Hebrew, namely, by gutturals, which have been 



VJ3UHS te OR 



already noticed; by 1ho loiters Is**; by the first 
radical being Nun; or by ilie second and 1hinl 
radicals being the same. Fmlwd Hie saint* classes 
of irregular verbs exist in Hie Jlobivw, (Jhaldee, 
Syriac, Aral) in and ihe whole of thai family of Inii- 
guagos. 



Wo liavo awn thai (he verb '^io is (Mnplo\e<[ to de 
the conjujcaiifui,^ The oh^sos cf inH^ul;ir vt*rlis td/.nim; 
dcnoltMl, for thn wih* 1 of hr^vifv, by one of the letters hi 
thus, 13, W,D , r Q n sbii'l for \MI-I,, thr (ir I, rfidi'al <f \\hieli 
is j^orj.; ^, aL, i^u , M ^l* , tlu-e tin* tuitldli* iMiln-iil |' 
which is ] o <u r , or the seeujul utitl ihirl railiVal-* the nuae ; 
and liuully p 9 wu^,, flmsc* flui last rndirnl tf \vhieh i- | or ^ . 



1. In accounting for the anomalies which evisf 
in (his class, it is to be observed that, Olaph or 
Yud begin ii ing a word must have a vowel; as, ji 
//# AY////, fis /w />/'//rV, and not jLrf, r lx*. See j} r>. 



2. In ihcj middh* of u \vord Olaph <H* Yud and 
iho proawlinj^ lotlor crannt be boih wilhont vo\u-N. 
This is ilw cK>ns(^{uene* of what is Kfaled in (1 \ ; for 
in fhoxo fornm when* two consonants wilhoul v<uels 
r tho Olaph or Yud beinty \\\v second 



VERBS fc OR i-3. 95 

would begin a syllable, and would consequently re- 
quire a vowel as much as at the beginning of a word. 

3. This vowel of the Olaph or Tud is generally 
remitted to the preceding letter; but when an ad- 
dition is made to the end of the word, to avoid 
the concourse of several letters without vowels, the 
Olaph or Tud retains its vowel ; thus, ^z] lie was 

if, X* 

begotten, o^Ul they were corroded, **+] I 



4 In the Aphel, Shaphel, and their passive con- 
jugations, the Olaph or Tud is changed into Vau 5 
which coalesces with the preceding ? and makes the 

9 

diphthong au; as, 



5. Olaph and Tud are dropped in the future first 
person singular of the Peal conjugation ; as, ^os) 

I shall eat, for ^oa]] , tL] I shall beget, for ] . 

* * x 

In other parts of the fut. Peal, and the infra, 
the initial u* is changed into I ; as, 



G. Verbs Ia arc regular in the Pael and Ethpaal 
conjugations, which are therefore exceptions to (5). 

7. In the Peal conjugation the vowel of the Olaph 
is m in the preot , and of the Tud * . In the pass, par- 
ticiple it is 7 in. the ono case, and * in the other. In 



90 VKIUS8 1-3 OR i*0. 

It 

the impor. of verbs Jo in those oasos where the second 

v ) 

vowel is % tho first is * ; as, '^osj Ml thm^ mow*. ; 
but if the second vowel ho v , 1hc first is - ; ns, 
D] tf# //tew, inasc. A similar rule IH oksorved in Iho 
future tense, namely, when the fioocmd vowol iw * iho 
first is " , and when thn second is f tli first i * . 

8. The Olapli in tho Ethpccl and Eihpnnl con- 
jn^iLions Ls sometimes changed into z ; as, tLL] fron 
t*] lie look* -*jzzl he ItmcnlwL Tndotd Olaph pre- 
coded by Thau is iV('<jiu k ntly cliniiKwl inlo Thau for 
tho wuko ofmij)hony. 

1), Olaph or Yud in ilw middle of a word 
in R( k neral in ' or * * Tho lull <r is soiwtimrs cluui^ 
into the ionuer. 

Tho verbal! he dt^ttrtfil t iiiukva ito iniju'rativ*' umod nf 
Peal conjugation thiw, 



Similarly M /r rt/w, 1ms impor. |i , w*2 , 



Th(; *^ of ''Vijj when it iiKsmrf f<*<j<i, luis th ////v/ 
as ofli'U JIM it (Hi|,rlit t^ luivi* Ji vowel fhi flic anui*y ut tl* 
n^ulur vcrli, ami Zsiin l>,y ili<* HIUIII* rulo is withnut <*m- hi 
wtich (SUHCH ilio vowel of Lomutl in r4*mitk'd to Xain; 



In tlio pansivd [uirt. Pi/al tho radical ** in nonto vcrlm 
the \owol iuntod of* ; an, uaAl /^A/, Itoitu li. i, 



VERBS ^3 . 97 

Tud in the verb ooi* has no need of the vowel *; because 
the second radical is not pronounced, and therefore its vowel is 
remitted to the first. There are however forms in -which the 
tn is retained without the Unea occuUans ; as, 
In lie imper. we have 



The Yud remains in the Aphel conjugation in the verbs 
^5^| he ejaculated, ^o*] he sucked. The verb ]1] changes the 

7 

final ] into w* ; as, w2u] he brought. 

X 

wu^& drops the first radical altogether in the Pael ; as, 

for 



he was faithful, in the Aphcl conjugation takes 01 as the 

7 

characteristic, and ] is changed into ^ ; thus, ^0*01 lie believed; 
so Heb; P9*tfT, Arab. ^ 



Some verbs beginning with Yud reject this radical in the 

imperai inf. and fui Peal ; as, ^ he knew, flit. ^ t a , infin. 

* 

^^o, imperat.^? ; .DU he set, fat. ou , infin. v^2\^D, imperat. 

* 



41. Verbs ^. 

i 

The anomalies belonging to this class of verbs 
arc only few ; the principal one is the rejection of 
Nun in certain situations, and tlie rule is this : when- 
ever Nun is at the end of a syllable and without a 
vowel, according to the analogy of the regular verb, 



OS VtfRBK ^U 

\ 

it is rejected. Wo have therefore ful. Peal ^=J 

K V V 

t for U5Q3JJ N(M~)nik 9 inf. uisio for u&jc. 

* *, <n 

for caauj from V^EJ. Fn snob eases UMI 2nd. 
radical has kwlioi \vhen it- is a ^s 1^1 lor. 



In tlio impor. Toal tlio Nun is Ihro^n away ai 
iho boginning of tlio word ; as, *xoa for usoru, caa lor 
atti. The reason, of this elision is porhQ]>R Hw 
diffioully of pi-onouncslnf? it \\li\\ va])idi<y in mvl\ a 
Rilualioti, and it lias thcvolbws l>mi iw^locstcd in 



The lithpool, Ptu fc l and Kthpanl <'onjKJifiuns of 
those vorlw are quiio n^ulnr in all ih<Mr forms. 

Verbs of this class aw not found in IIu k Khnphrl 
and its pa8ivc oonjugation. 

The vowul of tlio H(<*ond nulical in lh fttf, and 
im])cr. IVtil observes {pmornlly ili<*samo rule as regu- 
lar verbs; thus, JBCJ fie mil> **& ///' 
//^' Juwft lake, the vowel % ; lint O-M At 1 
jj U Jltwwl ifaiiM, hnvo \ Thorc^ nr<? u few excep- 

tion^ as, 2uj lunliweutletti which token* in thn fut- 

<* 

and impcr* ^a-j, Zcul, 

The rule for the removal of Nun dou* not jj>ly 
to voriw of this (ilasH, whcsu tlie second nitd third 
radicals are the warno; nor when the middle mdieal 



VERBS o^ or *-i>. 99 

is one of the quiescent letters ; nor in some verbs 

7 V * 

whose second radical is He; as, Sou, 3ouj. 

jcu^fio he ascended, is anomalous, and takes some of its forms 

from the obsolete verb inM ; as, gp imper. *&&& inf. 



flit, uott j Aphel. 
Olaph, characteristic of the Aphel conjugation, is occasionally 

7 

retained with the prefixes; as, 2u*]< thou wilt "bring down, from 



/ 

42. Verbs o^ or u*^. 

Verbs having Vau and those having Yud for their 
middle radical letter differ so little from eacK other in 
their conjugations, that they may be both compre- 
hended in one class. These letters are sometimes 
placed in such situations as to lose their consonantal 
power, and defects in consequence arise in those forms 
of the verb where that power is lost. 

1. Vau deprived of a vowel for the most part rests 
in the vowel *. In such case whenever another vowel 
is required by the analogy of the regular verb, the 
Vau is usually changed into Tud; as *p&Lt\ for 

, 7 7 V * * 

I , 2o* for 



2. Vau for the most part takes the vowel ' or *. 
When therefore another vowel is required by the 
analogy of the regular verb, the Vau is taken away, 
or changed into Olaph or Yud; as, yw for 

>o}o for >oo, fern. lo*o, plu ^ttuo, -&U3. 

* & 

H2 



300 



CONJUGATION OE VERBS \>. 



Prwt. Sinjv 3. innJU 1 , 
&. foin. 



ii. fan, 
L.cuiu. 

PI UP, 3. 1111W(5, 

1$. fon. 



2. ftm 

l.Colll. 



tt'ttl. 



indiiiiivt 1 . 
(hipcr, Sii 



Plur. i 



Fut, Si 



ii. tmm 

1. fun. 
1'hir, 0. ILIUM?, 

,'t. fun. 

2. inutu*. 



Purl, act 

pUMM, 



^Qftj 



VS-a] 



Ktliptvl. 



Rid. 



vi 



Etlipaal. 



EXAMPLE, <M lie eat. 



101 



Aphol. 



Aloof 



EUitaphal. 



V. V 7 * 



Shapkel, 



7. * 

k ,l >"a 



EshtapM. 



* 7 

n\*\nVn 



^7 

XOOA.J 



,-ioZZ 



* " 7 IK 



*, * 

O^-D oZZ 



102 



CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 



Poal. 



Prujfc. Smg. 3. maHO. 
3. fern. 



a, fern, 

Plur. 3. iasr, 
U. ft'iu, 



Ethpcel. 



hitinilivi*. 
littler. tSin 



ffUJ. 



I'liir, 



Fut 



IVia, 

IS. xnnw% 
3, fern. 



I* com. 
I'lur, -'}. ititiHC, 
.'K ftun. 



U, fotii. 

I, Coin, 



J'urt 






07770^* 



A * * 



7^7 0<H 

* * >. 



4 % 



77< 



A >* 



77<*r 
*A J . 



70^ 

A *J 



70^* 



1770^ 



1770^ 



0^770^*0 
* ft 2 * 



'71^ 



0^*^ 



! 7 rt 



1770^7^ 
1770^7 



80T 



104 CONJUGATION OP VERBS ^a. EX. ...nni he went forth. 



IVul. 



Afel. 



MhlufaJ. 



?rwt. Siuy. 3. mum;. 
3. fern. 
2. matte. 

2. font. 
1, coin. 

I'lur. & maw. 

3. loin. 



ooo] 



fi-iih 

Tniinitrivi\ 

ImjK'r, S!iif(. nifiwi. 

fwn. 
I*lr, tuust:. 

ft 1 1 it. 

Kui,. Siitft IJ, Jiiiur,. 



ll, IlULSt', 

-*. feu i* 

Plur. 3, JIKWC, 
It, font. 
S. maw 

li. ft'liU 

1. corn, 
furl, act, 



UDQOJ 



7 7 

>ZZ 

7 7 

uaZZ 

* 77 



,-noZZl 



.,017)ZZ] 



toodZZ 



VEUBS Qi Olfc wi>. 105 

3. In the Aphel conjugation the Van is changed 
into Yud ; the Vowel % which belongs to Van, is disci 
changed into % and this vowel is remitted to the pre- 
ceding letter ; as, yLo] for 



There are some verbs which preserve the o in the Pael and 

V 7 / 

Ethpaal conjugations; jo> he disturbed, >o>Z| he was disturbed, 

lie joined in matrimony. 

In the part Peal the Vau is changed into Olaph, and is pro- 
nounced Yud. When the third radical is a 'guttural or Risk 
the vowel * is changed into * . See 37. 

Throughout the Ethpeel conjugation z of the syl- 
lable z| is doubled, except in the 2nd. pers. and 3rd. 
pers. sing. fern. fat. This is the same as in the Ohaldce, 
except in the latter language the duplication is made 
by, the Dagesh forte. 

The verbs of this class are not found in the Sha- 
phel and Bshtaphal conjugations. 

There are some verbs having the middle radical Vau 3 
which are not conjugated after the paradigm ; namely 

(1) Those which have Olaph or Yud for the 
third radical; as, IOA. he was equal, ~o> he 

X 

was dmnk. 



(2) Such verbs as *^offl he desired, IQ> he rejoiced, 

;d* he danced, ^a^j he acted wjustly, 

* * 

In some verbs a difference of Signification is markec 



108 



CONJUGATION OP VERBS oi>. 



Pnet. Smy, "5, mawc. 
& fern. 



-. frru, 
1, com. 

I'hir. 'I. muse, 
Jl. finn, 
ii. iniust',. 
a. Ami, 
J. com, 

JaimiiJvi', 



. Sin;?. HUM', 
i<-m, 
riiu\ xiuihc. 

ftMlU 

| ( 1 t t* o 

. fi'in. 

-. IlilKiC. 



r, 3. num. 



2. 



Part, act, 



Peal. 



>cueZZ] 



Fuel. 



m 7 

a*o 

7 7 



< V 

>CUOI 

* v 

>OU6Z 

>oloZ 



v Sfl.i.Ql 

ft V 



* v 

yucu 



[7 1 atf 



770^07^ 



IOG<%g; in so 



[7^ 



60T 



110 VETIBS P, 

the Olaph is cither taken away or changed into Yud ; 
thus, 2^^ ZuX^. This arises from the circumstance 
that Oloph is seldom found in the middle of a word 
beginning a syllable, or quiescent in the middle of 
n syllable. 

2nd, Participles form the fern, gender according 
to the rules given in the Chapter on Nouns; as, fl^ 
fern, ll^, JJL^> fern. l^*. 

3rd. Olapb in the 3rd pcrs. sing. priot. of all the 
conjugations, oxwpf ?onl t becomes Yud quiescent in 
* ; as, w2^ s . 

4th, Tin* infnK is subject to tlio lt rule; but 
in other respects ii IK regular. 

fit.h* fn ibo im]K k r. INwtl and Uthpool Hin^. masc., 
Olapl) iw chnngod inlo Yud ; in ilu % former it refits in 
', in ilia lattor ii mkcK a diphthong with v ; thua, 
*-Xx and tJ^ % 4. Bui in ilm oiltor coTgugations 
Olnph rnnninH and WSJH in . Tn tlw fom. " makes 
udipbthonff ^lih M. in the plum! formn tlio third 
rad. i <*ith<?r tak< v rt away in all tho conjugations; 
or passes into ^ ((uitwuMii; thim, 



In the Killed l\n\wr* nin^ inaHr. of |Ld or v*ia we have 



fith. In the ftit. tcno and participles, Olaph rests 
in * ; but before tho aflixcH ^o and ^ it IB taken 
away. Itoibre the afilx ^ Olaph piascB into Yud 
movcablc; an, 



VE11BS 



P, 111 



In participles joined with pronouns, the third 
radical 1 is changed into 4- quiescent, for the most 
part in - ; as, k*X^ <o2u\.. 

In the plu. prat. Peal of the third person we 

7 ,7 T 7 

have o^^and ciX^for oji^. ^P^- Iu some instances 
the Olaph is preserved when the affixes are annexed 
to them ; as, *0io TV* they loosed him. Acts xvii. 14, 

wK7io]jo they called Urn. Mark x. 49. 

Some verbs in Peal change Olaph into Tud, and 
are declined as the prseterite of the other conjugations ; 
thus, 

Plural Singular. 



The verb u2u| is not of the Aphel conjugation, as 

X AN 

is manifest from the vowel * being under the Olaph. 
It is the Peal conjugation with Olaph prosthetic. 

A few verbs of this class have 7 in the sing. numb. 
masc* of the imper. ; as, *-M drink, ^io. swear. 

* AX 

In the 3rd, pers. plu. praot. and 2nd. pors. plu. 
impor. Peal, some verbs take the paragogic forms, 



! - h* ! * r r ! ! P ? 



! ? 



n i - n n ? j 



M 
M 



(f/ ! U.V 






F-'il'o. ! 




7 



Xp. 




t : 



EXAMPLE, jL he revealed. 



113 



Ethpaal. Aphel. Etlitaplial. | Shaphel. Eshtaphal. 



0-^44 



^4 



n^N^ ft 



ft A<vT> 



11 i< VKUUS "s^. 

45. /V/7/.s- "^, 

Vcrhs tthioli liavo the second awl third radicals 
the stnne lose the middle radical in the IVal, Aphel, 
Ktlitaphul, Shaphel aad Ksliinphal conjugations. Tho 
vo\vel ofthe middle radical expunged is remitted to 
the first. With tin* exception of tins defect and a 
peculiarity in (heaef. pm-t,. Peal, t lie whole, inflexion 
is quite retrnlar. The Kthpec'I, Pael and Etlipattl 
gal inns n-tain Iwith the radicals, and arc in (ivory 
i regular. Hut lor flifH\Vf>la,st conjugal ions tlio 
;ind Kl/i it"l juil ionns arc ntost ft^qucndy 
If* ///v^, ^v^lu^ hr ttt/i/frfw/, op; //6* 

i M , * V 

.al^, L-uHw**, M s^b-A, rtnd v5> for 
f rh< inipcr. nml fill. IVal re<Mi\e on tl. 

U>e \o\\<-l * up , according to tin* rnlo laid 

down lor <|MM fornis hi (he re*?, vcrlm ; tluin, ]oai 

* * 

In* //*/// *//r///, <^ 4 |J ///' it'!// rft'ttiw* 

In the ae|, jmrK l't*al the middle radical in changed 
into Olaph, hut il is pronutineod as Vu<l; ihuH, wjnl> IH 
jn*imoniic'<d Jlt*-ffMi I II, 'When an addition mmatlc 
(o Uie end of this |irt M th<^ Olajdi wilh its vowel 
is usually taken fivvj^v ; as, ^j, ^v^- Hoind.inicH } 
p, the (llafth iw retaitu*d, es|Hcilly in tho vcrh 
twrtl; n.s % ^jl, (tan. j)|l, plu. winwe. ^)^> 
fern, t&li, The passive partiei|il<* J*il is regularly 
formed ; as, w 3 ^t(\ HottictiuM*H ilto iirnt radical 

as, -*X, Matilu xxi. 5. 



buu* O!it|ih f<r ho wcoml and third radicals 
in i 



OBJECTIVE AFFIXES. 115 

In the part. Aphel the middle radical is sometimes retained 
having the linea occultans ; as, ^*^^l^o shadowing. 

The Olaph, characteristic of the Aphel conjugation^ is some- 
times retained with the prseformatives ; as, n-^|v^ to kve. 

N B. The 3rd. pora. sing. fern. fut. of all the conjugations both of 
regular and irregular verbs, has sometimes Yud at the ond ; as, 



The Objective Affixes attached to Verbs. 

46. We have already seen that different affixes 
are added to verbs to mark the person and nimber; 
besides these, others are frequently attached, which 
may be called the objective affixes; thus, ^Ai^Ls she 
has slam thee. If the verb be intransitive, then it 
must be translated with some preposition to preserve 
its connection with the pronoun. We will first give 
a Table of these Affixes. 

When a Consonant precedes the Affix. 

Brag. Plu. 

*! imper.) <JL (^JL imper.) 



Oi 

2nd. pert. masc. Prat., 3rd. per*, fern. Prat., and Nunpreced, 

Sing. H Q - 



masc. plu.) 
2nd. fern, plu,) 



110 



CONJUGATION OP VEBBS 



Pnu*.8in&3. muse, j 
3. fern ' 



\ 
3. tern, j 

1. C011L I 

*, *J, maso. | 

& it Mil. j 

2, iiuwc- 

! 

1. IVm. f 

1. rdju. ! 



IUIJUT, Sni,". imiw. ' 



Kiit. Siu^. ,%. uiitw-. [ 
3, f,'tu, j 

I', tlUtHC, 
1', It-Ill, 

1. crmi, 

I*lur. 3, inmk'.. 
ft, ftm 



y. tttitu 



qco 






Aylirl 



Ethtaphal. 



PI 
-P) 



p 



T 7 - 

pzz 

T V V 



optj 



piZ 



T * 



t ? * 

D f! 

?Z2u 

* ? * 

fiLDZ2tt 

ft 7 A 

tpVvS/Z 

# V * 

ilSuZZ 

t T 



EXAMPLE, i>=> he destroyed. 



Shaphel. 



Esttaplial. 



PoJpel. 



>=>= 

7 7 



EthpaJpol. 



opp 



118 OBJECTIVE ATTIXKS. 

Ptwel preceding. 



Iln 



Yiul nnd in lh Fuf.) 



ft will no! ho necessary to extend ihc paradigm be- 
yond the ,l*eal eonju^iiion, for the others avo inflected 
liko it. Wlu'ilever devinlious Uiere nrn will 1> ^fivcn. 
NeilhorwIH it be, neeessnry to{;iveexniuj)Iosofirre?u- 
Itir wlw, exeepl thai elnss di'lhem which have Olnph 
for iho third radical, nnd of v\ hieh, on aoconnt of Homo 
Htrikitiff peeuIiariiieH, pariicuhir notice nnmtlmtiikon. 

Tho first and second persons of boih jumihors 
through both ih( lenses do not take, the* objective 
ailixofl of lh saincs ]Krs(n, otherwise, tho HiKtiifldation 
would 1)0 rwijjroeal, which !H usually i x])n i RWl l)y 
certain, (jonju^ations* 

Tn the pwl. the third ]xm phi. fcnu has two forms, 
and <jtd, one the, simple and tho other tho 
; eacli of them takes tho affixes. There is 
also a mas. parago^ta form ^^10 * 

Verl) of tho see, porn. phi. pnil, of both genders do 
not receive tbo ttflixcH tpcr and ^01; instead of them 
aro used tho gopurato pronouns ^j|aiul ^] . 

The following trnuspoHition of vowelb takes place 
in receiving tho objective afllxon : 



OBJECTIVE AFFIXES. 119 

V 

becomes 



47* Praterite. 

3rd.$ers. sing. maw. ^S^LD he has slain. 
he has slain me, ^2 ...... us, 



thee, rnasc. ; -oX^ thee, fom. ; 

you, masc.; v o\jLo you, fem.; 



Jier, ^oj] ^U) ...... them, masc.; 



...... them, fem. * 

3rd.pers* sing. fem. ^S^lo she has slain, 



...... Ihee, maso.; -aMi^U> ...... thee, fem.; 

...... yow, masc.; ^sti^fro ...... you, fem; cn 

...... ATO, AiXi^ ...... her, ^wl 

masc.; ^1 ^^ ...... ^m, fem. 



, sing 
tJiou hast slam me, 

%m 9 CH^^JD ...... her ^oa) 

...... Ifcm maso. ; ^i ^^u= ...... ^0% fom. 



OBJECTIVE APPIXKS. 



Ikon 



, muse,; <**] <-*^^J ...... M/w, fnn. 



prr*. * 

* * 

9 masc. ; oJ^Io ...... ///^, fern.; 

" v 

, muse,; ^u^o ...... ///;//, fim. ; 

fl V * 

...... hint, AZC^w ...... /// 

, ninttf, ; rr^l l&fc ..... ////'/, 



fiim. ; 
...... A/?/ 1 . ^Qa) oik^p ...... M**w* t mane,; 

^4] ois^o ...... W/w, fom. The oth<*r form lMHJOiin 

taken tho adiKOM of tlw 2nd JMW. Hirif(, timtus 



mane. ; 

...... yw/, fern*; w^ 

. The other forttt bwmun# 

taken ihe afiixoH of tho 2nd, JKTH, HIII^. maw* 



t'UMj '/^// ..... w 



'// 



c */"/// 
r* S;w 

* 

;//// wfl(/ v/T* 



122 OBJECTIVE AWTXKS. 



P/u. nwnb, 2mL pert* wane, 



. pcrs, f<nn, 



...... ///v. 



,,.,., //^r* fVin. ; 



...... /it'/ 1 . 

thy* 



w^O^OS Or w-OJO^QS ...... Mt\ ^aii^OjC Ol 1 

or *-*oi-aa^ao ...... //////, en al^cs or 



or ,iU^ajS ...... mr 1 , ^O^LO or 

or ^qui^afljs ...... //////, <ni^o^ or 



nuiHO, ; LiaioS^Ai ...... /^ fern.; 



OBSERVATIONS 0>r OBJKCTIVK AFFIXES. 128 

;irr/. per*. /tow. X 



, mast*.; * iaaS&oa ...... //<w, finu.; 

, masc.; ,-*ail&w 



t 

//////, CrUU^tNOJ ,,,.,. ///'/'. 

Parliciplrs nn seldom founil with th 
nlUx<*; wh<*n they are, tho mrHliiicatuin Hwy 
is (lie name as thai for noun*. 



with //J^>*% 

11 will 1* olmcrvcd from 1h<> for<fjoin^ *xnmpli f s v 
ihat vi'rhB nml nounn lmv* ni^nrly tin* wmw 1 vouri*! 
chan^H; (bus, ^us, \vhnt it tok',*i flu 1 Hlx<% ri'iuits 
\\\(\ in UP (s<u* p. 110), \\\I'H']} is siniilnr to 
In iho uthrr )HrsonH of the win^. ilir voMcl JH 
on thi WMsonil raiiirnl to v<i(l *hm h'tliTH 
lofp*tlwr without a vowH. In tin* third jH*rHOi jihtnil 
of Imth ({iMidivji Uw f in put l*c*k on the flrut ltinr v 
o rceui vim % and - of UIA fern* in tekim ft*Ay* The 
first ntid meond tmrwrna* plu, prewTve )K>tli 



V(rl>H having* with tin* w^ond rud* it'tnin it in 
wliorr v in iouiul in ^&, 

Imviiig Olaph or Vud for the iirnt radical 
may to referred to V^; for wlimutviT %6 in (Htituitf 
of a vowel, thoro Oluph luui * and Yud * j wlum ^ 
', Olapli And Ynd htivo th wtmc*. 



OBSERVATIONS ON OBJECTIVE AFft'IXfcft. 

Pool, Aphol and Shaphel conjitKiifions retain the 
first vowel immoveablo, but the Heeond they (linnet* 
in tho same manner as in Peal. 

The affix i*mo is used after Yud, **a after those 
which oud in o sen-vile; this is the <*nse throughout 
tho coiijiifjationa. 



In t!io inftn. Peal tlio Innt vowel is taken nway, 
except with the suffixes <oa and ^^s ; hut if it h % us 
iaverlm having Vau <he fte<ond radieal, tlie viw*l 
remains. In tho other conjugal ions having the tenni- 
nation o z is added willi the suffixes. 



Tho impcr. of all the conjugal 1011^ wherr the tnitldle 
radical Ima anyone of the vowetn % or \ doe* not 
chango it.s form in the sin^,, nnd inm'ttt Vud before 
the affixes. 

The vowel o in tho plu. nuiw-, in romiited to the 
iirnt radical. 

Paol, A])liol and Hhnphel etmju^aliuns, vvlirn the 
hnpor. a^t i <H with the pr*l. f east away the \o\if! of 
tho 2nd* radieal before the suffix PH; as, ^-^^-o^| 
bring him. But verbs having the middle radir;l 1, ^ 
or , an well an Homo pHratyo^ir foriUM, retaia ttu* 

OH, 



Tho M* pern, of both wan bora, 2ntl, JHTH, 
.i and JJrd, pern, KIH^ i>f both Kewler 
neeond vowel before UtealJixoK aitd; but it 



OBSERVATIONS ON OBJECTI VK A FFIX KM. 1 23 

is lost in ihe others. The remaining persons koep 
bo<h vowels In all tin* fornui. 



The wrb IL irith 
r 



Tho forms 'whieh end in }, vix M prcd. IVal m,j 
Imp. Pael, Aphel and Shnjiln*] in .')r<L prrs. sinty, 
nmsc.ca.st nuayl, Iml wtaiu the unvel > 1 t v uliii'h 
o annexed <o thr vrrlr, as, ^u^, ^i^ f 
In tho Tuf, Poal fho 1 is channel Into 

, ^? > . t.\^ > cruik^i; |>at 
* * ** '* 

and rr the ) iw removed, although " in 



Tluwo forniH ofth<jfvi*rh ending in j, Much as <Jo 
futures and [mrlicip^ vf]wn (hry im* the {il!lxifH, ai^ 
iUMniHiomed to elmn^' ) into ^, tlic vowel liein^ re- 
iaine<l ; us, ^*i*X^ , yA^j . 

There in (his jiecudmrSty In the fornin tenninaiiui; 
in o, that they eliatw o into co or c|; a, 
Maoka^ or ^o&^ %NaoaS^ or **ioJL^. 
Tito fonn u% which itt the termination of tho 3rd, 
pm*t plu. of ail tho oonju^ationa oxt^ept Poal, m 
ed before (ho afllxe* into cu; tin, aj&jt 



In ihoHO pnrtB of the verl> which end in ^., 1 lie vowd 
IH either expun^od, and the ^ boooinen inoveahle, or 
}oth % and A arc retained; ai 



120 



CONJUGATION OF VEIVttH |3 WITH AFFIXES. 



AflU Sing. 



Prut. IVftl. 3. mm A 

,'l. ffllL 

JJ. IUIIKC. 
1 font, 
1. com. 

Vlur. il nmw, 
r>. ft'in. 
ii, urn HI'. 
a. fcmi. 

i. I'dtlt, 



1 Mn^*. 



J !-K 



t " 

, ^t .X . <A 

" ^ 



I*IMT, Siiitf, ftwiw*. 1 

fciu. 
Tliir. 



2 K.iiu 



*v ' X 

r-*^. k I ***^ 



t^, I), mu'e 
Phir. Ui*luiiiH tlm finn <l* the rirular vi*rl*. 



I'lur, 3 nuuut. 
r flto othiir pomourt follow 






1 



fin |>or, Hii^, ninxc, 



Pitir, i 



fl'f.K 



faf revealed, 

,'t Muse. i 3 HI-HI, I 1. llur. 



127 



"srSi ...*^ 

loAAs I o^ 



SUiM wro j.iliwsl witli lln< 



r 5 ^ 

X 



2 K.I.I. 



t ho wtim 1 muniH r. 



r& ' 



328 OBSERVATIONS ON OBJKCTIVB 



Thoro arc many parts of th< verb which follow tin 1 
regular forms of ^jLo in wry rospoct, viz. llio pnni- 
gogic forms, the 3rd. jiuro. MUJ:. fom., Isi. and 
2nd. pare. shift, and plu. print. ; 2nd. prrs. winij. ftin. f 
2nd. and 3rd. pon*. plu. mam*. uncl ft*nu fut. ; nrul tin* 
inf. of all the conjugations, the inf. IVal 



iiiHtfincas arn mr l t with in ilio 3rd* pors, plu. 
of the Pealcofij. whoru flu* !lnl. nwl, Olnph in 

it * V 

roininod with tluj nflixos; *is, v*uio| ////;v An/v M\t 
U. This remark applioM nlso to lli< i liud prrs. plu, Imp, 
oi* bolh ^cndorH; KB, ^ol^ /^y^' //////> John \i, II. 
Thin custom of preHcrvinp; ()l;tph I'H also fuiuxi in the 
pnrtic\ JVnl IIH well at* in tho Tiiip, sin^. and plu. of nil 
the active conjugations; aw, u*U^ //r////yy ?///', l*s, ix, 
It ; **ijatt W^t^ m^ y Cant ii. 1 If. 



In the futures, vvhcro YuJ qnuwtiut MW* i\w lu^t 
before tho ttttttixos auothor Yud IK wmwfiwc* mUo 



Hoffhmn, howcvT, douUs tltn truth nf tbin, mul i\ *(' ujinim 

that tho Yiul him ppit into ihi* t^xi in t!ii,i nrt'l fli'r plwn 

thnni^h t!t cmvli*iwmi of isliroi-H. Sn- hi* <rnw. S\n p. i 

In I (*ur. xii. ft! w* luivtt tin i-Kani^l^ of lln- V*l Iwing iv 

JoetoAs vhs. ^wo^ / w/// i** y 

* utted ffr ' i*i[HK*MiIIy Iwfiin* I!HI (lix<*i wf 

wing, fimp; t in l*n!> Muttb* ii. lf 



In 



DOITBLV DETECT? VK vKKns I2i> 

with tin* affixes much more fre<iiipnily than tin* jinny IJL',I"; a,, 
Mf-7/ /w/i*f/ A/M* I.H found rather than M 



40, / 

The irregularities in \erhs, il ' 1JH ' <pn J!n\*!d\ 
observed, nre i>r(MliHM<l 1>y lun inir n** nuliivt 
ihr letters Olnpli, Van, Ywl ur Nnn, vOtit-h in 
sitiintioiiK is dro]>|)f'(U or by 
third rndic-als Ilio wtnu\ T!MTM IIKI.V 1>* rtMf hni 
nioro than one* radical, which In mihjrci in elision 
<jUit^<Hnjc(^ Of our* it will mil hitppiMi at fhn 
Utno- that all ilm letters will disappear or I 
qmVsmilj for the principlrK on whiVli thrM* jM*tMi- 
iiariiufH depend cannot operate ^iinultaiteously hy fiy 
eonihinalion of circumstances so aw It* produce thU 
edect* H will therefore follow thai HOIIH* lettern uf 
the root must reniain in every ^mrl uf theeunju^tion, 
und that in general no two eoiisecuiive letter^ ran he 
at the sarne tiine J4nhje<t to defeet, U Mill he snfll- 
cle,n( to consider a few itiHttnicm of donhly 
whiah mny 1w dirktad 



1st. Verlm with the ftrni radical a Nun IMIC! thr 
third Olaph ; a, U** /^* /^/yV/w/, Hthpeel w^jZl^ uher* 

7 

Ohipli JH changed into Vud; Aphel ^ when) (ho 
ifiilin) Nun in im^ilatcuL Ho t* 



ISO IjrADItfUTKKAl. UIKHS. 

2nd. Vorlw having the first and third radicals 
Olnph ; as, )Z] /// WM/>, fat. Peal UK Inf. Ufci ini|Hr. 

U, Aph. h*2ul which possess the defects both ol M \af 
|3 //r ltiM<*ntwl< ful. MI, inf. 



JJrcl Thosn with the first radical Yuri and the third 

Olaph ; as, }&*, or ^ic* ///? ^/ro/v, &*& / //r^v> ^rr>/v/ 4 

I it * * 

? irilt furfw, ]&]& fo jw/vvf/' t iinpcr, *JLcu A ph. 

lco]. ^ ///' ///y/^ ful. MJ, inf, W^. imper, w*L 
> i ii 

Aph. v-*^:J, 

'ltd, Ver))K having the wrond and ihird nidifvtls 
Okiph. 11* h? foplHuh\ wln k ii(*f rjnl, pern, pnrL plu. 

O^D, inf. HAID, iinpcr. Mi)a f ful, Jlw, ^*IJ A/* 

1 , * 

fut itf, inf. W^ impcr, *41, Aph, ^B1 f or 

IDCH haw the shortened form of the ful. |M, an well 
an the ordinary 



The Hyriniift have some \erlw composed of more 
than Uiwjo leifont; liny arc not numwmw, and an in 
Hebrew and Arabic, an 1 - elw'lly derived from trilitenti 
rootn* Thoy arc formed by (he additi<m or repel it ion 
of n lottor, ami undorgo liltleorno ftllernfion tvhtm 
the prcfixc-H arul nllixrH arc 1 annexed, 

f. By the repefiiion of one or tun of tin* lettern 



<;rAi>ttiuaim, \ MUJ<*. I'll 



of tlm Irilitoral root, and chiefly i those CI^CK 

i ho second and third radicals am the WUHS or the 

in Iddlo radical Van (s<** g W, io); thus, 

V V ' 

Kfc^/"' tlMgywl ftfottfj, fVoni ^ 
he mtft MMjuwf/wl, from ?flc // 

dhl if/'f.fH) or ///v/r/Av^'/, Jroin ,r^- //> ///W t or 
< *mv //^/^A*, nr ///,vv'//^ /*/;//, from .^** 
/ry. It \\ill kn MTII JVow tl'M' nml tin* 
following twamplw, that llir u-^n^nil f^flVci ol* tin 1 
duplication in io #ivr tncroa^'d inlt k n,siiy to <hr signi- 
fication of the orij^inal word, 

If, IriMtunccH of tivool'tlti? radical* iM^n^n'prnUt'rl 
aw, yiVnSMZl A/? ilwnM&IJht ** fatty thM\ from y^ 
A*" rfmutiwl ; v^^*M ///' itfwffiftwti frotn s^fA 

HI* Home appear lo lc <'<iupoiindiMl f two * *<rl ; 
as, ^j) ///' //v/w ;j/// //* HluiMCi from M ^ A 

and ^ Ac iNMtltwt, 

IV* By the addition of n li?ltcr to tin* 
of a word. 

(1) y>; at, *&& Ac 7>/^</c ;/^>/% +&S&BI) he 

* 






r*//w/r? y^ixw 1 , from lln Arnbi<i , /// 



(i) us ; aw, *flni //w Intott'iiwl) Ac tn'j/*'tl) from 
Thin in pt'olmMy a variety of HhapbcL 
(#} Z ; a jlfili Ac A/^A/, IVom 



k ! 



1-'W PAUTICLKS. 

The hitter Van is sometimes inserted iu the middl 
of a word ; as, ycsi* /// /fr/Wfv/, *^ai**l] //*' /<//# 

plwil, from the root ,& //<* Awtmf ; pc //* 



\vo havo *- ; jw t 
from ^^ //r? clwuffrtl, p0 //^' 

" 9 / 

fi from fax ya; n, ^micu. //< pfwrcri'tlt from 
twitf/* $ ; an, ^s^;^ /^' r///v/ t from v *^* 
AMIic <*n<l of :i wonl vv* 1 find sunu'tinn's tin* i 



ti/ittt'fff) from Z^ ^ /MUM*; *+t** /it 1 .Y// 

'. 
or L*M! //wr/fr, hc/aw/It. (.'miiiuon fontin of this 

kind MI* -*?rl "*^P> nt 
* ^ i i 

H is umiwfMNury to ^i 
only oi)H< i rv<' tlmt t in UK* 

follow in #(>ru*nil thr, principle* Initl duwu fur 



01. I'AHTICLKS. 

Iftidnr lliiH i^nu may lH^omj>*t k la*ndod words wliirli 
n used in ^xplainin^ inoilifvin,^ and rmuMriin^ 
purlH of a wntrnri', f nj nuhnu^ 
?, Advorl*H, t'r^pomUou^ Cunjitni-tiuus uiul 



t Ofthw. 

^l <// <w/fv, 



ADVHJIHS 



hi {Jt<*c/trJ,(t 

! 

or 



2nd. Ofplruw. 



tllHirf whhth wty / ^Z ////vv. 



dttwrfa o 



or - NN 



////// ///i//', ^>-*^ t ^ p //r;/ ///'A *- 



rt ^ ^>, >? wtetbtrf fwjff A-ao i.o t w, 
wr A^ / (which i forftuul fmrn tlto mtrorb 
and tho pwHOimt pronoun ocn) 5 ^ii^ /M l/* 



any m^tiv^ tin tulvcrhmay lx fornuMlhy adiiing 
termination lul~; an, 



UM- 



SOUK* hvpositiotiK iiro iiivlixftl In vi-plis. iwun*. 
AT,, uiul others arc wpnrah 1 wonk Tlnw imM row- 
niouty used nro D />/, i* /#, -diii A;, <*////, ^A 

or 



or <t(/((htxfi V- f/V//, */C| A(;/J;/v\ +&*wtiu t it!tui to, 



c 

^ PI (/ //<//, 

^ fa* /////, V s ! 



Thn ItrjVrtimH arr lot 

Mcrf/ ^ imr/ ikas / ;/m^ }i ^v/ 
HJ), rfu/r/' fe V / 



ADVHJIHS 



hi {Jt<*c/trJ,(t 

! 

or 



2nd. Ofplruw. 



tllHirf whhth wty / ^Z ////vv. 



dttwrfa o 



or - NN 



////// ///i//', ^>-*^ t ^ p //r;/ ///'A *- 



rt ^ ^>, >? wtetbtrf fwjff A-ao i.o t w, 
wr A^ / (which i forftuul fmrn tlto mtrorb 
and tho pwHOimt pronoun ocn) 5 ^ii^ /M l/* 



any m^tiv^ tin tulvcrhmay lx fornuMlhy adiiing 
termination 2u|~; an, 



UM5 SYNTAX OF SIMM' \\TIVLs. 

Ifcir. Ileh. 3U7. 2; 1*3* wiis ///c iwth uf (j 
//<ww r/ //>// /('//', Kplir. Hvr. ;J.'I:K 
s, u here the absolute uml eonst. states ha\e 

the waiuo ioi'iH, air p, ^ws, o xst y*, y-cu, mid tnans 



ih<* Hocond hnw the iorw <f an ncljiTiivo; ss ^.^ 
tuJ-cu> //w /v///// ^^\ ILuk* 1 xxii. T0; {i*t^> ^i^ ///// 
/////// rj/<\ Alaftli. v, 2. n l 5 ll. 

TlMtr'Uitiv<M^ used ii"{ <*niy jicti\rl\, htit pns^iv^lx ; 
i.e. tlir liouit \\lii<'li isplli in tin- i;vit. is unl ;ilu;i\s |)ir 
subjn'if htii tin* f>hj<'< 4 l of ,'i ph'cnlinit' noun ; ;s Jnil, 
i,\. SI I, **^liS;yJ i^aiui ^AA; pfi^ ////' injury (lining 
fa UH' wrt'Mffj MHM of Mtilrtf'hH ; !M# En i^ib 
11, u<* haw*, ^> onl^! /,v/^// (at) tint 



Although pmp<*p nnm wlil^tn rrw 
y<l th<* imw^H of ( v ounii*it*H, cities, fivers, \< i , r lor th 
Hake of nil nreiifttte tleseriptiun, do sn 
of (his euuslrucliou; us, l:ru */3*il.2M*s 
i, xui. !. 



A noun iHofien louud in th 
atwoluto ntuiiv \vlten it IH follwved hy 
a preiKmtti 

,/J'<w, i* (** 

* Mutlll, HIV. J! ; JilS f^ijS Mi' 



SYNTAX OK St HH'JANTIVIX 

) whw wo have IA*P for }a 



*4^ for ^-po, 2 Tun. iii. 2* The 

* 

KOinetimos separated fromlhr nouu; as, |p> 
1 Tim. i. 10, wlinv w< 1 haw 3i*. for ..... *aa 
Tin* (Ipfnuir slnlo in its ]>riiuary oflin 1 i 
(! ly inti'iidrd <t> tvxpivss a (l(linitc* MMISP, /,/. it isu.sril 
to dirod th<j atlmtioii lonjmrtit'ulnruljjii'l orolyrris 
known cither liy tiTUvorwilily or jiroM^niiifiH!!*! or 
[wviottHly by fionic riivitinstan^r ; ;IN, U*^** 
bony IMX cwMi Ito^ }il W / w// /A 
occurs in all (ho mw'H whrrn I ho !Hibr*w 
wl, iifututy b(^ (^bscrvdd by com]ini*iiiK th< 

\vilh Us Syrinc version, 1'Vom ilm same com, 
parison It may also In 1 soon thai Syr noimn nrr put 
in 1h<* drf, Mate iti niuiuM'otis in*i;mt'<* uln i n' (In* 
Hr.lu'ow nriirli 1 tu Iht'corn'spondiujjc wiiwU iMoiiiitli'il, 
this M'liii 1 has IMVOJUI* of much woir %www\ 
tluui in ail probability it orient filly had, and 
many o&mtjilim arc 1 ibimd whew iho d<*Jlnita Jurja is 
rmiploymli which hM<int tt> Hhovvthal it and thtutlmohttc 
arc put itdiwn*imluutdy for two anotltcr; for lluw in 
no npjMirni rrftsou why (Mi<^ should )jav( v hr(Mi tinrnt ia 
ptrJWciu'o (o thi 1 other, Th rmuwjiiwici* in that to 
cortrun ruio ran 1^ ^ivcu lor unin^ the driinito Mnt\ 
At tho (nuiio limn its nnnl(^y to the Hebrew n in very 
ftf uud lhcr<^ tn no doubt in the mrly period of 
r it wu Ixnuul by 



' l * L. *; 

* *" **<* 4 

: v r r ; 

" - * * 

* r * JJ S J *< 

* 5 - S *J * ? * 

t : " ; 7 s t S ; 

j s i ; ^1 72 5 



i f 

M 



?** -";ii = 
-i-*5 i ' 1 "j 

/ r . s U 

* * 2 \ h 7 Z 

? - ^ 5 J 2 

U ^ '! l*t Iw 



H:i^;; 



, 





^f'.isS 

nirM 

*\ I j s x i 

^ * ftl ^ ' ** 

.>*"?:- 
* " 

^ ft! |H 



J * ** 



;^i 



Uli'Hi'^ !jl !t 

* .: '' s " t i . s " ? ; t - : 

-':-.- ^ i J . . i . : n 



? *^ - : f I 

2 ff* *" 



r^ii?; 



4 * * 1 * I* '* 

- ^la 1 * 5 v- * 'it 
.' ' 5 f ji ^ * i 

i'.rliiM;: ji::t 




8VXTAX OF StBSTANTIVLS. 130 

such cases > is usually prefixed 1o thefolUwinj* noun ; 
as, ]L*o> Ijlik ,/#/#/ o/' ///f yjc/wMitt'/ 1 , John xiii. I ; 

*^* a 

)!& f&Jaa*Z Mr' //to/// fl/ 1 6W, John xi. 1. KIT 
21, Thin construction way be 04111 vnlrnt to ^ "^'** 
or ^ iu !M>n\v, wliirli serves somclim^s s n t*ir- 
cunilocufion lor 1!io const niffivr sljitis 
HoviM'sil \\orrts JUT sonu'litnrs luaiid to tnl4 > r\ t ni* 
^n tin- first and wcoml of tliu nouns su con- 
; us, V^l&u^ ^o>Zu ]sw *9tolu) oip> ///^/ 
mtu t/n> wit t{j* ttnyiwl, 5htr Jwob's Ki*liolin 
hy PhillipH, p, *. 

Tin* propor unnioH of nnu ilo not arhnit a drlinitr 
statis. A few appear <o Iiav* 1 it, l'caus* tluy (ormi- 
naio with Olnph ; htit nuoh nouns an* in lit* 1 al>Holuf<> 



A noun is put in apposition with another lor Hie 
purpose oCcli'limni; or c\ plaining more Hinirlj. Hence 
we frequently liml employed in this manner nouns like 
}tt}^ittlittttl) iLuJjfr f/7// t &. Ht> also K.i tilth nn 
afllx, when plmnul after the m*lfetauUv<% tuny he 
; aw* ot^o )^* the ;><w/>/< v /// r/ /Ar//>^ L e, 



A noun in aHontenen ban Momotimw to 1)** (nuts- 
later! into Kn^linh prefucuul hy wueh expansions as 
ttflCWtlitiff tu, irit/t /YW/WW/ fu, (lit tf which rttttihw (u, 
4<t; UH, ^ ^M IdDta* *cu*i-o ^///// (vuth rt'Hpeci to) 
/ w/W lw ywttlw thtnt HIM* Cjun* xi H ; 
neronlintf to) /Ar umttl^t' qf <tll thaw, 
i, 5 



1 iO COXftTUUraOtf OF ADJECTIVES. 

In Hebrew Iho parliclo n# Ls sometimes found bo- 
forts the subject noun, but tho Syriac has rarely 
imitalod it in this respect by the use of tho corre- 
sponding parficln u. Nevertheless there are some 
examples ofllw prefix ^ bem<* put before tho sub- 
ject; as, \z+z]9 oiiuo ai^ Vsz] ]&&> has the offence 
of I he mw witked f Oal. v. 11. See also Matth. 
xxvi, 11; John xxii. H, 



A jtfiwf nftwv/h'MM ih<^ Wyvians have not, except 
ft levMNslanttrs wliielj nre lound in tlioiv version of the 
Old Tcsiaiueni an<i which ntny be eonsequontly re- 



T|M reiK'tidon (fu noun wmietlmcw denote** diver- 
sily or a nuiliiiuile ; as, ^*.\ t^ 3 wM* dhon tongues, 
Aelw x. 4(J; ^1 ^p /// MMQHH HUMM, John v* 4; 

^f^c^ *^u uu ttfJMcd wtlh mtny coils, Mark ii. 17. 

' / - 4 

It denotes also a dislribuiive, WMISC; 4i8j fu? v 4 *? ^w* 

X 

i Matth. xx. 0. 

Kulistuntivcw a> often expressed lay the 
partieln p put before the noun ; an, l2c^ P ignorance. 
Kotan iliiiiiwitivu notniM ur Foiunl. They are demoted by tho 
ti'rmtimUtm 10 *r uao; |jop 

tt mtttt Jimtoiiii ov fltffc 

*, y 

tttaa!So ^ link dag. 



My \vhellw$r they aro used us qualifying 
or \vhetltci* they aro employed as predicate*, 



CONSTRUCTION OP ADJECTIVES. 

agree generally with their substantive in gender and 
number.* The exceptions to this rule are the same as 
in Hebrew. 

When an adjective, or passive participle, has the 
office of the predicate, the logical copula being ex- 
pressed or understood, it is put in the absolute state 
with the same gender and number as its substantive, 
and before it ; as, ^ w^Zcu^m M <n pa 3 my sin is greater 

than Gen. iv. 13. Occasionally the adjective or 

participle is put after the substantive; as, l^oL^ 
jn^o the feast is prepared. Matth, xxii. 8. 

An adjective is usually placed after the substantive 
which it qualifies ; as, ]te*4 tlo$ the unclean spirit. 
Some exceptions to this rule exist : when an adjective 
is made the important word in the sentence, it takes 
precedence of its substantive; such adjectives arc the 
epithets of saints, holy men and women, &c. ; as, 

?*>*> 79/>0* 

Ogatas p-3o- blessed Paul, ^0*^0 |2uiao^ blessed 

at 

Mary, &c. 

If an adjective, or passive participle be used as an 
epithet, and it be found in the absolute state, the 
Dolath is prefixed to it; as, -AIJ poj the dry fish. 
ELnos. Ohrest. p. 76. The same rule is observed with 
respect to an active participle, used either partici- 
pially or as an adjective; as, lLJ ? |k$o> a high place. 
Bar. Heb. p. 288. 

Negative adjectives are expressed in various way& 
1st by p put before au adjective m th<* doftolte st$,te, 



1 L2 <JOX8TRrf!TIOy OP ADJECTIVES, 



\vhni it is used. as uuopilhot; as, 
,//////; fL^lc P h'wfhiuif; U^si&i p bitlimitte; 
)adh0 P iiMM*i>wltfmiblt\ When tho negative 
wljHivn is nuploywl as u proclicailo, tliou it is ex- 
pressed by placing P before ii in its absolute state ; 
ns, p*jU p iujnttft' is (!o<l. 

J3f Hi>mtiu*s nmlcpH ilio atljoctivo negative. Tho 
adJHtfivo is in t!u nltsoluio Ktntii and omployod as 
nn opithrf ; ns *z*2Lte P nw^lkMc. 

A n<"^ili\<* aiijcclivp is somotimos oxpvossod hy 
Py |iit< licfiM-i 1 it Hitbsiaiiiivn; as, licoio p ? without, a 

//to/, u 1 . iMiiMMlutt* ; lie? P? fr/V///r/ Wwx/, i,(^. blood- 

ft ^ ji 

//w, ]&LD Pj irillitwl dwtti) i.e. mniofM. A o is 
found pn i !i:'d to tin 1 suhsianlivo; as, I^D p> 7^7//- 



Hvc.ral KuI>H<ai)tiv(H wmio together, and an 
ndj<'cti vv (M 1 part iciplr iw addod {o thorn, it IB put in tho 
pltiml nuruhor and maw* gomW. Soo Horn, xvi- 21. 

Tl word ^o //// is plawd Ar/rw its substantive, 
and iiidMluoM in a ploowtHfio use of Iho pronominal 
; as, U*& sri> /*/' vM? tnnlUfnd^ Aois, xv. 12; 

/^ rhirfpi'itmb, III, all 
f >, . f 
w, Mnlth, ii, I; |*a) cii^ 

Hub. p, !KI. 

In thn <mtpnmtivo dogrr^o thnws is Homctimow an 
Hlipsw of tlw adjpctive by which tlm sort or reason 

* V * * 

IH indicated; M, Itaj^ (clearer) 



SYNTAX OF NUMERALS. 143 



than the noon-day, Job xi. 17; ^ 

p * * x 

^f^QA ^oo >o^t>o| idols and sculptures, (which are 

X X 

more powerful than the idols) of Jerusalem and Sa- 
maria, Isaiah x. 10. The comparative degree, which 

itv 

is made by the particle ^ , is sometimes to be other- 
wise explained than it ordinarily is ; as, ]toj *+<* ]z>i 
\+o ^o Is the thing too great for the Lord ? Gen. 
xviii. 14; U>o] j&s oi U*^D <Jo but iflhe way be loo 
long for thee, Deut. xiv. 24. So also when ,-i is 
placed before an inf. ; as, inn^ViS ^ *^o!^ai ^^ |a/ 
my sm is too great to be forgiven, Gen. iv. 13. 

The word u*-J is sometimes instrumental in ex- 
pressing the superlative ; as, ->Zo^ -**> the head of 
M>yjoy, i.e. my greatest joy, Cant. iv. 14. So also |po= ; 
as, IIM^O fctpoo the Jirst-bom of the poor, i.e. the 
poorest, Isaiah' xiv. 30. 

A word is sometimes placed between the substan- 
tive and adjective; as, t=>J ^ l^i but the great king, 
Bar Hcb. 335. 3. For the neuter of adjectives in 
other languages the fern, is employed; as, &L}i)r 
one thing Iha06 asked, Ps. xivii 4. 

54. Numerals. 

Cardinal numbers sometimes precede the thing 
numbered, and sometimes follow it; as, HF\ V **M 

f *V * ^ * 

two men, Acts i. 10 ; A* ]&] pU w wafer-pots of 



114 NVXTAX 01? NUMERALS. 



t j , John ii, C. So also when thousands are to bo 
numbered, tho wimo observation applies to the numeral 
which numbers i hem; as, ^^ \*&* fine thoimnd, 
Mark vi. 14, and jliaL }:xk Mallh. xiv. 21. 

Cardinal nmnhtu'rtnro frequently found to occupy the 
place of ordinals. In Luke i. 3D, wo have lliiczl lieu 
lit. ////' fifty irjtwfi in <>if//i/ 9 i.e. MM eighth day; so also, 

,i * V 

^*+ &ba /// Mm* /w/v,-, i.e. at the third hour, 
Matt h. xx. JJ; ^^ tui. w> //w//w, i.e. the tljtth hour, 
Matih. xxvii. W. In many plaocs cardinal numbers 
are, lined lor onlinaln, and the noun numbered precedes 
in the onMmelive. state; as, !j* taJi* lo the Jirsl 
ywr, lii* Mf yw *lfw* .Dan. i. 21 ; l^o Hiiu, 1 2ujo 
lit. hi Ihi* r/wtt' uf nit 1 IntMlMtliniil (tut*, i.o. fa the six 

tfa #h? ImNtlwtl tiHtlfvttrtli //mr, Bar Hob, p. 100. A 
(ordinal number m in a few instance put before its 
noun In tho eonHtruetivo state; aa f inMatth. iv. 25, 

!, lit. a 



OrduialH, likn adj<div(*H, whn joined to substan- 
tives, w, found in tho same gender; as, Uiulz \*s>4 
l,lw ttirtl *wl 9 ]LL&t llo-l liu* third te<t*t 9 Rcv.ri, 5, 
Tho Kami) rule Ix observed for mrdinalw, whether thoy 
IKJ (employed m eardinalH, or whethor llioy perform 
tho oftittti of ordinnln. 

When tho tiling numbered proeodos tho cardinal 
mtmlwr, it in nfttmlty put in the dof* tato; M, 



SYNTAX OF P310NOTJNS. 

)^ jZoi one year, Ear Hob. p. 22. fcfcL )al ten 
Rev. ii. 10. Occasionally it is found in the absolute 
state ; as, Eu^z ^* three years, Luke iv. 25. 

When tlie thing numbered follows the number, it 
is generally put in the absolute state ; as, <-*!* l* 
three years, Luke xiii. 7. Now and then it is found 
in the def. state; as, U2ol ]&t three days, Kov. XL 11. 

The half of any thing is ordinarily expressed by 
as, cn^ao liS>z ]&ol three days and a faitf, 
. xi. 9, 11 ; or by |/o^s ; as, **co3j ZCL^A the 
half of my goods, Luke xix. 8, 

In designations of weights, measures, jflnd times, 
the noun which expresses the weight, &c. is some- 
times omitted, though not so frequently as in lTobre,w ; 

as, usms; fcS^ a thousand (stolcels) of silver, (Jon. 

* * * * 

xx. 16 ; whore the word |LoZ is understood. 

N"S two (loaves) of bread, where the word 
loaf 13 understood, 1 Sam. x. 4 MO ^aaol 2dZ 
^?^ deny me three (times), where understand <.tat' 
Mark xir. 30, 72. Ellipses of othor notuiB ore noticed 
in Mickiolis's Gram. 180, and AgrdTa 83* 

55. Syntax of Pronouns* 

The logical copula, as has been already stated, is 
frequently expressed by one or other of tho jxmonal 
pronouns, aad that with tho Unea ocoullww* But 
when existence is meant, tho gubstamtiro rorb i* luod, 



14(1 SYNTAX OP 



find {Ilia without. Iho li/wif occwllfttia; as, |ooi )il OLD 
in him wv //'/!'. 

ill, COT and uoi tsiko iho liuca omilhms under the 

j 

first 1Hfcr when they express the logical copula. 
001 and *^n also fm|ucntly mnit the vowel to the 

r 

preceding wovd, or oust ii away altogftthor. 

The WHIM pronoun in repeated in many instances, 
HO that iho fornu k r is th .subject and the latter occu- 
pies Iho ])laf!< of the logical copula; as, $ tl I 

*> V / 

<;/, Jolm x. 0; ^i* 1f*&& *ju w/ ^>'<? dUe!pk8 9 
John ix. 2H. Wli*H personal proiiounn arc put for 
lh(ftu1)Mt(ui<iv< vorh, they Kotuctimoft (Coalesce with the 
prctTdinj; word; so i hut Ilio pronoun audit hecomo 
cno word. vS<*t 25, p. 01. Thu wo have wio 



0*001 



i Clal v. SJ. oa^* / ywri, AHMOinani T. iii, 
p. 204. i^^crui^^ Muuifwlt Gal iii. 1L v utM we 
hunffWt 1< Cor* iv. 11. 

The afllxoH to V(*rh, al though usually expressing 
an amis., yoi Kom<*tunoH dt^noto othor carniH, OHpcoially 
fhrc duiivc; an, -jtocru ^/^ /utvt (/hett to 
xv. lU,att If *A to^u: the ablnti vo ; as, 
/ww M#, I 1 **! Ixxiii. 27. When the socond of two 
nounu in r<*|fimit IIOH th fc*roo of an adjective, the 
pronominal affix it* appended to it tathc*r than to the 
Connor; UK, w** ? oc*> 1^&* ///y j ^m/^ ^/^/,y hoUnm>i&* 
xn'. xx. 3 ; yl?aef f/up M<? oUy qfthy 



STTNTAX OF PRONOUNS. 

holiness, i.e. thy holy city, Dan. ix, 24. Some few 
exceptions to this rule are found; see Mattli. Y. 
29, 30, 39; Lukexxii. 50. 

The affixes are used passively in some instances ; 

** v 
as, ^Zo^ not my prayers, but prayers offered ivp to 

me, Isaiah. Ivi. 7; see also Exodus xxi. 20; Isaiah 
xxi. 2 ; Bar Hob. 218. 14. 

A peculiarity of the Syriac language is to be met 
with in the redundant use of its pronouns ; in such 
cases as, 

1. Affixes when they are placed before Dolath 
of the genitive; at least they are of no use 
when translated into our language; as, 
<*>ot*> ci^o* lit. the fame of him who is Jesus, 
i.e. the fame of Jesus, lljoicjw cnZp the 

X X 

daughter ofSerodias. 

2. The affix of the verb, when the noun to which 
it refers is placed after it; as, <nncod >t* 
oiA*5 and he sent, out it off (I mew] his head, 

f X 

i.e. and he sent, cmd cut off his head. Mattli. 
xiv. 10, Often the noun has a particle pre- 
fixed to it ; as, V*\^ ov^o* lit. he took him 

m 

(I mean) the child, i.e. he took tlw child, 
Matth, ii. 14. 

8. When the affix is annexed to a preposition, a 
ritnilar construction is observed; as, }ft^A 00 
m it, the hour, i.e. in tlte how. Sometimes 



148 SYNTAX OP PTIONOTTNS* 

tho preposition is redundant as well as the 
affix; as, Jtools ^j <o<?o fat in Me days, 
Matih. iii. 1 ; ]*+*&> yii cc icilU him, with 

at * 

C7/m ( /j i.o. with Chmt, Horn. vi. 8 ; ^xy^o 
i\ ** * 

^Acn &from ffaw, 1 Tim. i. 0, 

4 The pronoun cm or o<n in such instances as 
^ii oep lip^ JFW/A to tftc Idly, Matth. 
sv. 17, cot ]ZoiikJo fy /^////, 2 Cor. i. 21 
W ^c^c oai ZCXD^I ^> 7 w/;w/^ John viii. 28. 
Tin* pronoun ccnor om whe.a it couloaeos with 
the ptvcrdinf; word, is Notnotirnon redundant; 
jftK, (u!&o mranK not only iolio hf hut offcon only 

irho? H(*o iliiiilu iii. 7. Also cui ?/^. 

*'* 
M((^ ifatth* xii. 7. coi^ to Ihw, is frequently 

ftmtitl in AKwmftTi, Biblioth. Orient. Sets 
Tom* iii. p. 2!)*% Tnum 5 and 0. 

The prouoinift //^* lihN*t!l/M\& tlw *//w tho Syrians 
have not, hut (hoy nro oxprrwHed by n little circum- 
locution; UH, 

1, By a repetition of Iho pcrnonal pronoun with 

v 

the purtiolo ^ placed botwemi; as, 

Hob. x> 



U, By tho juxtaposition of tho pronouns o# 6m ; 

* * t * V t ft 

IIH, Zogt iZcu llrfft* 001 ocno /^/c/ /7/^/ /wv? (Zr/y 
wwir /A<* Mtihtth, John v, f), 
'fl. By V> with an artlx; aw, "In tho month 



SYOTAX OP PBONOUNS. 



of June jAxt? oiX*> of the same 
Mich. Chrest. p. 69, "Bishop lAi^ ? 

"" X * 

of the same city" Assem. T. L p. 28. 

4. By the composition of the personal and de- 

*>, Of 

monstrative pronouns ; as, 001 and V 01 **<* 

ffo e 7 o * * 

and Ijoi &c. ; as, |^0 t= H 001 lie himself 
when he came, Bar Heb. p. 508, line 14; 
If* M>oi the same, Matth. v. 46. See 25, 
p. 61," 

5. By an affix put to a noun ; as, A*& oiiccua 
in his day, i.e. in the self-same day he died, 
Bar Eeb. p. 278, line 10. 

6. By }-lo5 spirit i as, ou.o> poip destroyed 
himself, Sirach II. 22; by ]L> essence; as, 
-u>u thyself, Cant. L 8 ; by lao,^ , Trpoawrov 

* K 7 7 

person; as, oisc^p ^^ ^o^ himself, Assem. 
T. I. p. 485. 

The prefix of a particle to ^ is frequently ob- 
served; as, a&+>9 ^o he whose it is, Gen. xlix. 10. 

X 

Sometimes a preposition is found before it ; as, -^j ^ 
from mwe, John x. 14. 

An affix annexed to the word ^*> is frequently 
employed as a possessive pronoun ( 28), when the 
sentence would bo rather ambiguously expressed by 
placing the affix to the noun or the verb; as, . 
thine is ike Tcwgdom, Matth. vi. 18 ; 



SYNTAX OF PIIONOTOR. 
I 



to 7ti# oiw> and /// 

* * * 

MM ;wf, John i. 11. Thoso possessive pro- 
nouns NOVVO also to give a particular onorgy* to the 
word to which they belong; than *^+) ]!DJ w//y M;?.0, 
John vii. S; 1his IH carnally Urn <*aso whon Iho affix 
is liktnviso ndd(l to Iho noun; nsj *J^> i^is&o my 

tm i 9 1 * 

tti John v, Vi ; ^? yi^a / ///// ^', Luke vi. -12; 

X. Jolni iv* 3k 

A pronoun is in sowo ins(nn<*<'H found Imforo tlio 
noun to which il rofiTs, mid i phiotul at a considor- 
from it; UIUH, i**^ cn>c^L=> ^mikD|^ ife 
aw it* ///# //w/// woutthtitt, PH. ixxxviu 1> 






v. Jl. Kui'h <*oimtntciion (xiHt principally in 
tlm vcTMioti of tlio Old Tcwtnmcnt, and on Uiat account 
may pcrhajm b<* rcfrar<lod mfrnly as a Hebraism. 

Oa tho othnr hand, oxaniploK arcmot ( with whoro 
the pronmm WIIWH aftta* tlu^ ant<H^dcmt, but is sopa^ 
ratitd from it by KO Ion;; an interval, that for the sake 
of more flmtralu HjK*<*ch tlt noun itwlf ought to have 
employed; as, Iwaiah xlv% 13, <Zv*sl W JAoiw 
fa vw. Cyrus who is montionodiavorsol* 



* In Hyritttt tmiwlfttMuts frrui tlu Umk> newrdin^ to 

^* with (Ui tiHlx in lint tu U inMiriclmKl * giving utiy oHjxxjijil cnotgy 



lt tli word to wliirit it lutftu#t ; but only K tw'mx a Htrinior rondor- 
iu^rf fhcHint'k jw^wvwivf, Umm, % 1'Ji!. r HiiH nnnurk oftho (liwim- 
jrnmhnt (inimiuurian nwtH on no ottHuin 



SYNTAX OF PRONOUNS. 151 

Pronouns sometimes do not relate to the noun 
which is nearest, hut to one going hefore and perhaps 
separated from them by a long interval; as Psalm 
xliv. 3, ^oj| Asuo |y^vV Ipc] y^i thy hand hath 
destroyed the people; but thou hastplmted them (not 
the people, hut the fathers in verse 2). 

On the other hand, the noun itself is sometimes 
repeated, instead of using a pronoun; as, Gen. xvi. 16, 
Abrcvni was eighty-six years old when Eagar bore 
IsJmael to Abram yopjl. 

The Syriac writers occasionally indulge in a change 
of the person of the pronoun; especially, from the 
2nd. to the 3rd, pers. and vice versa; as, Luke xiii 34, 
Jerusalem, Jerusalem, ^*L*p &^Jo jlzj ftL^io 

07 .V * 

ch^o^ ^M*Si> thou slaying the prophets and stoning 
those who are sent to it (to thee). See also Gal. iv. 21; 
Horn. ii. 1, &c. This kind of enallage hoth in pers. 
and numb, is frequently noticed in Hehrew, especially 
in the Hehrow Psalms. 

Those nouns which have only the plural number 
sometimes use .pronouns in the sing, numb* and 
sometimes in the plu. ; as, Luke sxiii. 45, t^a] ^^]o 

oiL^D <-i |la*ai> ]^JL and the veil (faces) of the door 
of the tewple was rent from the middle of it; but in 
John i. 4, we have a plural pronoun <o<n*M |lo 

and the life is. The dual noun ^>$& Egypt, admits 
a sing, pronoun. See Hob. xi. 26. Collective 
nouns, signifying a multitude of men, take a plur. 



1R2 SVXTAX OF IMIOXOI/XS. 

niaso. pronoun ; as, Ifcii* Hoi). 121. 15, oi 

*i V V 

^QJ| *A3*o /// /t't/ {iicity hi* fatuity funltfiiU tliem wj;. 
An inlciTotfalivu is somotinws promlcd by a noun 

v y r 

in ilw, cotiKtruHivc Htnfc fc ; as, *-.AJ] ^ Zp //^ daitgli- 
let* of whwn tn*t HHW f <icn. XKIV, 2**$; or, which 
is cujuivalont to it, fli*' di 1 !', sialo of the noun is 
, (tnd Doluth ]>n*lix<*d to Iho inl<'rn)gat.ivc; us, 
^# ///f //r/y/^ of whom have I 
. xii. 1M. 

pronouns are usually expivswd by > pro- 
ftx(d J words; or by H> !nitni)}{iiiivo pronoun and 
> ( 2fi). Hoiui'liai^s tin* personal pronouns with 
1 a rotalivr; a, pi*.> o<w who Mtule, 
Zv*] **oi ^///r?A w; Eplios. i. 14; 

r y Mullh, xxv. 1* * prdixod to a 
pcmmui pronoun inakon u relative; as, **0vaAfi 001? 
wlwslwll rtitaii, Matth, H. (J; op^ ^aam^ ^Aa wmt/6'. 
Multlu xix. M. 

pronouns of tlm Iwtaiul 2nd jHtmoiiH arc 

i tf v V 

prrsscd Iy ; as, <J>> UJP oj mutt, who 
jtulywti Itoni. ii, 1 ; ywufc*]? M/W ^/v, Acts xxv, 2*t, 

An oblique* cno of the. relative Dobith IB indicutted, 
Ut y byooiuwcling with tlto. I )ul nth a personal pronoun 
put in thaiixuw ; as, C^ lo /////, cru 

C* * ' 1. 

! CTUA ; to /rfAw//, ^OJ0wt /o 



SYNTAX OP PRONOUNS. 153 



> in whom, ^ to me, ^ ...... > to 

whom, r to thee, * ...... > to whom. jJnd. By an 

oblique pronominal affix to the verb and Dolath ; as, 
"I am Joseph your brother i-ojoai3i> whom ye sold. 
Gen. xlv. 4 3rd. By an affix to a noun and >, the noun 
having also a preposition prefixed ; as, o\^p> in whose 

X 

7 * * o o v ^ 

hand. H^Ul* l^co-a <pcro in the days in which he 
was bomd. Bar Hob. p. 611, 19. 

The accus. of > is sometimes marked by this letter 
alone, without any connection with a pars, pronoun ; 
as, ^=>v* >ojl man whom He had formed, (Jen. ii 8 ; 

V ? 1^ ^ 

pihj ^D all things, which He had made, Gon. i. 31. 
Other oblique cases of the rel. a*o occasionally ex- 
pressed t)y > alone. 

The relative pronoun 001, forms its oblique cases 

* V ' P 

thus ; CFIS9 001 in whom, masc. &o. We have also oo^ u*oi 
in whom, fern. Asseman. T. III. p. 374. 

The oblique cases of the relative pronoun > ooij are 
expressed by an affix following; as, <nh*3h m ooTj whom 
sto brought up. Bar Heb. p. 297. 

Tho oblique cases of the relative pronouns > ^D 
and. ? |!*j arc formod cither by an affix following, or 

by prepositions prefixed or separate ; as, Mj r* 

* 

jf! oiii he wlw hath ears, Matth. xi. 15 ; " He slow 

]iojl f r p wtom TM wisfod," Bar Hob. p. 850 j 
hmi wJwm, II). p. 216. 



15 t SYNTAX 0V 1>JIONOTJNS. 

The pronoun > is occasionally omitted, but not so 
frequently **w ilio relative ^ in Hoi) ; as, ]L]o 
fcMfa*lsp </tf/J 7/0 re/to /,v <//;//', where |L] is put for > iLf. 
Sots also 1>8. xxxii. 2 ; Bar Hol>. 487. 1. 



iivtf pronoun*; (see 28) arc expressed by 
with the affixes; ns, olaa ^JL agawat itself, 
Luke xi. 17 : by feccoo wrtMftnHM ; as, 

nffwiwf Hwlft Luko ii, 17 : occasionally by ]aS 

as flfiaJM lr 2to*^o //^/rf 8<wik litttfflHitl wtlihi her* 

&>tf t (Irn. xviii, 12, The wordn *ul and lial aro 

^nf>l(yf'rt to pxprrgft w/jy 0/w ; as, ^ ^J] <] 
// ////// / tthttll Hftjf to you,) Matth, xxiv. 23. 

hig or ttHfft bluff i Hlgnillocl by 
aw, (Icn. xviii. H; {Ijio ^i |Iosj ^m }D] 
////>// /^ f/wtt fur the Limit The word 
fro;v/ M/////, IH likewise ihuw used Soo Exod. xviil 26. 
So atoo i y>jio tuiy thing* Reo Matth, xx. 20; 
Lovit. v. 2, \Vc havo U!KO fl ^ o^tote one; as, 
lii^ / ^rfr// <?//^, Ijuko x, 38 ; IH U'M 
<7. eartttte wouwut Mark vii. 25, ^ and *-4ij arc 
joined toother in this sonso; thus, 
rt r^/y^/^ /7n^ Aw&cm. 1\ I. p. 83. 

Wo havo nlfto ^ tl itRod thus ; j&co* ^ ^ f^ one 
ttfllw d(ty# 9 l.o. OT ff nyfftoto r%, Bar Hob, p, 127 ^ 
or t&o only fo cm]>!oy(ul in the same way ; as, t*mo*1 ^ 
a wrfatu ant ofkb bwlhtwit Bur Hob. p 107. 



SYNTAX OF VEKBS. 155 



some of the branches, the Syriac translation 
K\dSa>v. Horn. xi. 17. Also ^f^ )* M there are those 
who say, i. e. certain say, Assem. T. I. p. 10. This is 
another mode of expressing the Latin quidam. 

7 7 9 v 

One .... the other by t~o . . . . *** ; as, r^&J ^+ 
i-osZuj jao 002-0 ^aZZ #0 taken and the other left, 
Matth. xxiy. 40 ; by *^j| and W ; as, mcu*)3 -*j] 
6e o?a0 #o #/*<? otf/ae?* his trespasses," Matth. xviii. 35. 
Some .... others by ^-ii) in the former member, and 

*l in the latter, see Assem. T. II. p. 366 ; or by 
repeated, see Assem. T. II. p. 304; or Jby \ M 

m0 * 

in the former member and faf*] in the latter; or 
following members. See Matth. xvi. 14 ; John xii. 

^ ___ - - * * V *" 77* 77) 

12. We haye also ^ ^=> 3 ^M^D, *** t^=>> or ^ ** 
and their femininos for each one. > -*I^s whosoever 
that. See Matth. xii. 50, &c. 

56. Syntax of Verbs. 
Agreement of the Verb with itt Subject* 

A verb agrees with its subject in gender, number, 
and person ; as, U1 ^QA* Jesus came, 

Mary anointed, T ( *SQ.\Z o^]^ the disciples ashed. 



Nouns which are used only in the plural number will 
receive a verb cither in the sing, or plu. ; as, |ooi VMA ^ia 

A 

in 7*m w<zs ^, John L 4 



HVNTAX 03? VEKBS. 

and t/w life is ///<* tiff hi of wen 9 same place. Tho former 
is gnumnutii'ally teriwd mnxtrurfifi ad senwm, and the latter 
ciHtstrwlw ml forwam, Several other exceptions are fouud 
to tlie fiwvgcmig Amoral ruls which, although not so fro- 
qut'nt, arc of much the saino character as those which exist 
in I 



WIuw Hruirul sulMinntivcK come together, the verb belong- 
ing to them i put in tlu phu uuinb. nuisc, gender. 

Collcriivu nouiiH nw fc , on uwount of tlicir signiiica- 
lion, joined to a vrh plural; as, &-1 <n^nj y in Bar 
Jicl). Cliroit. 100. 1H, o^ t ..^iL] |Ll tiHottwr army 



. * KtMi also ifi< ltJl.2. !l; Aswimu JJibl. Orion. 

* V V * V 

J 5, "' * ////, oocn w*ito> %o ^ f//;wi aU wAa 
with tu<\ In Ihiw manner of (ronntruistiou \vo 



iind 

nuuiyoiluTS* \V<t have* wmtHimtw u nouniii 
dcnolin^ hut oti in<lividuul, and yet being made to 
ntuwl for a cl'ass, f he verb is put. in tho plu. nuiab. ; 



* 
Jet*, xxviii. 1. 



A verb* in#, in domuUmroi joined with a plur. noun 
when tho verb pr^fcdcH, oBpeciutly M attd &A; as, 

c /^^/ ^^ *o/^ ; ota ]om u| 
r/ /'/A 7 /^c* porches, John v. 2. 
Mutth, 1IL 10> ^.^..* tfuS ^iLazf Mtf Aeww ?c^(? 
0/vwrt/ /////o A/M ; Cfp i^aw /Af fuffiliw* fall upon* 
Bar Hob. (Jimm, Uk . 7* 



SYNTAX OF VEEBS. 157 

A verb sing, is also occasionally joined with a plur. 
noun, when the verb follows ; as, ]ooi ]teou the days 
were, Bar Heb. p. 581. 8 ; pj \^ Me elders ruled. 
Bar Heb. p. 16. 8. In this example, and others in 
illustration both of this and the last paragraph, tho 
plur. may be intended. The o or ^ at the end of tho 
verb may have been omitted, as wo know that not 
unfrequently it is. 

Verbs, adjectives and pronouns have no dual 
number. Henoo the numerals ^L maso. and ,-*2*z 
fern., with the noun which thoy qualify are joined to 
a plur. verb ; as, <po<?u ^vz two shall be] Matth. 
xxiv. 40. See also Matth. xix. 5, and Luko xvii. 
35, 36. 

Collective nouns of the fern. gend. are often found 
with plu. verbs of the masc, gond. ; but this diversity 
of gend. may bo required by the sense; as, jLf oiSa 

<* f p 7 

<-co all the earth weep, 2 Sam. xv. 23, where M 
earth, is put for people of the earth; similarly, Gen. 
xli. 57, olf jLl o&> all the earth cwne, i.e. all fh,e 
people of the earth. ]l**l] is thus constructed in. Bar 
Heb, Ohron. 148. 16. The proper names of places are 
for the same reason sometimes connected with verbs 
and pronouns of tho plu. masc. 

There are many examples collected by Hoffman 
and AgroU of a difference in gender between the 
subject and predicate ; as, *}'&&] oai*4 occasion was 



SVNTAX OF 

, Bar Hoi). p. 012, It, 



(wo 



, p. 
/cy/ HiMtittuul MM/* /JwVf/f/W, ib. p, TOO, It, 

"When a substantive is of tli coimnon fjonder a 
diverttity of i^*n<kr is wmi(Jim<'< found between the 
verb, adjective and pronoun in ronncdiornvith it; as, 



shall be 

ii. IL 1; wlnu-0 \vo hav jowiod to {IsJ the 
Am. cf&Z and (ho maw. ufltx oil. 



"\Vluti itmiiy iioutiH conuj iogothcr connceied l>y 
th* oonjiiurtiuu o, (\\i\ vcrh Ixdon^in^ to tliosc nouns 

K V *' A V 

in j)iU. iu tlu i |jlnr. )iiinil)t'r; an, o<u&*o 1^]^ ^Q\{i 

^utOaO ,7V/fV, ////(/ Jtintw t <tuU Jolm and 
wk&l ///X Aliu-k xiil. !J 8eo Oen. viii. 22, 
Ex* xvii* 10. Them arc uxwptionB to this rule ; espe- 
cially whuwtlu* vt^rb is put lirnt ; us, *-ujdioo ^M^>^O 
<nul Jfwtfi find his MM nutewtlt Oou, viu 7. 
OecaHiostully nn cxtu'ption m Jbuiul, when the verb 
i'ollowH tltc subject ; ns, 1|^&J P llicojo iLffl a ^//t6 J W 
/iicrf *pwr iwiv w/ w^i Jud. v* H. 

AVhoti Uio nouiiH mining together n numtionod in 
UM* biNt pftrngmph dilHr iu fpmdttr, the {j<ndot of the 
vorb u(fmH with that 1o which it to noureist ; as, 

Miriam mid Aaron 



SYNTAX OP VERBS. 159 



Numb. xii. 1. toiujj |taS,ao ]$&*>]> justice and peace 
shall kiss each other, Ps. Ixxxv. 11. 

The 3rd, pers. of verbs sometimes admits an anomaly 
as to gender; as, |2uf*&o oooi there were camps, Bar 
Eeb, Chron. 324 6 ; see Mark xiii. 21, and many 
other places. 

The 3rd. pers. sing. both, of the masc. and fern. 
gender, in passive as well as in active conjugations, is 
sometimes used impersonally ; as, <oa^ *+]sj it will 
be evil to you, Jer. vii. 6 \ ^ ^\&A it was good to us, 
Deut. vi. 24 : -KJU^D it happened to him, Luke i. 9. ; 
Ll\ it came upon thee, Job. iv. 5 ; U^ looiZ 

it shall be to me a testimony, Gen. xxi. 30. 

The Syriac has no neuter gender. Honce the fern. 
is used in nouns, adjectives, pronouns and verbs, 
where a neuter would be employed in languages 
possessing this gender ; as, ^^x ll&-^ ^o*a l?oi 
this happened on the third day, Bph. Tom. I. p. 220. 
See Kirsch. Chres. 219. 6; 220. 1. There axe, how- 
ever, several exceptions to this rule ; as, low ]*aata <] 
'if it be possible, Kirsch. .Chres. p. 509. 1. 10, where 
the masc. gender is used. 

When two nouns come together, the latter being 
ruled by the former, the verb occasionally agrees in. 

90 w * 7 

gender and number with the latter ; as, \i*o *&*& 
P^LcJ the number of the slam went up. Bar Heb.. 
p, 552. 



!(><> SYNTAX OF VEttJBS. 

ttwa of the 7Vw', 



lictiulcft the past, the prcrtovito is occasionally 
employed to express other times, 

Events of fut urn occurrence, \\hioh arc considered 
as oortain to happen, have this certainty represented 
by the verb boinj? placed in tlu 1 pwtoritrs tcnso; as, 
ttitfltiff !)t tltirktitw py l>mw ov* W/^7/ */f 

w/v/) ///vw/ %/// Isainli, ix.2 ; Ul fl ^L^ 

. P * 

]-Cc ^ atbh J^ P] ///' comefh nut to con* 

, * * 

hM t /;/// fl//f/// /ww (A/^/// iMMint) ffMii (Iwrlfi to 
life, John v. Uk 

It IH found, an may bo iiift*wcl front tlio pro- 
pnra^rapli, that tin 1 pwloritft in 

\o cxprm a prophof'u? Cut. as in 
On thi point it may bo wi*H to quoto tho following 
remark of Jlolfmwi : jttwMbM/M 'hi rcwfaMi V* T. 
/ft I iff jtwl* ww. fut. COMMW 
vV wl twin: ntomH> JMtftthim 

v//i/w. Ornm. ]). 3!BJ. 
arc hypothetical wntonws in ivhldi it in 
ttnmi!ttOii tlmt tlift tiling Kpokonofwill mmotopasfl: 
in ftueh <mmi t thowfim*, tho pmt. in tho natural form 
to employ ; IM ^ooiJbbd ^MTI ^H^CO <a 

/// trnttbtn tmd till tknw thinyit httw 
i 'Dinii. iv. 80. 



SYNTAX OP VERBS. 161 

We find the prat, of the substantive verb followed 
by the participle of another verb not unfrequently 
denoting the present of the conjunctive ; as, " wo 
require from you ^S}3 ^^ {ob+ooiy that ye vnay know 
them." 1 Thess. v. 12. "I will ^^o oooJ that they 
pray." 1 Tim. ii. 8. In general the prset. is not often 
met with to give to a sentence a subjunctive or con- 
junctive character. That is usually done by the fut., 
sometimes assisted and sometimes not by particles 
accompanying it a as will be found stated more fully 
in the section which follows. 

There are a few instances in which tho *pia>terite 
of the verb ]ooi, followed by a participle or an 
adjective, represents the imperative ; as, Juf ^>] ^1 
t^L 2uooi liaoi go thou also (and) do the same, Luke x. 
37. This application of the tense is undoubtedly to 
give emphasis to the sentence. Por as a pra&terito is 
employed to express our belief that some future event 
will certainly take place, so is it readily seen that on 
the same principle this tense may be regarded as 
the emphatic form of the imperative, whenever it is 
so applied. 

The prseterite has sometimes the force of the plu- 

7 V V 9 

perfect ; as, y=&j -*opi! his worfo, which ho had 
done, Gen. ii* 2. Again, in iii. 1, wo have, " And the 
serpent was the most subtile of the animal* 
the Lord had made, \1(& t=^?V* 

H 



102 SYNTAX OJ? VERBS, 

In Syrino, as in llelivew, the pnetorilo is in some 
instances used, where *\vo should employ tho pre- 
sent ; ns, l&t* I tuotr, lit. J Jut re Iwoirn, as com- 
prehending eertainty imd decision ; 1 know and 
I am resolved to art on this knowledge, Luke 
xvi. 't, Sec also John .vi. I. Tho pra'tcrito lilcc- 
wiwMlonoirH pwHPiit linus vkhou condition and Mtatc 
are implied; an, yla] *-ODZ| liii^o ^ 
why tn*t tJwtt r//V/j/wW, ^w// ir// f y w 
*^n. i\ f . 0; u*Ay &a^| 
i IX exviifp (Ueb. exix,) 28. It is likewise 
employed in aeuteweH in whi'h the truths enunciated 
are j^iiewl, niul not at all dependent on time ; aa, 
IN, L 1, " Hh^ssed in the nmn > who wtlk* not (halli not 
ji in tho eoanscl of the widcod." In- 
the preterite, in tho lant example (evidently ox- 
tho nenthnent eontjiined in it with more 
accuracy, iHH'luisc with mem* tfenerality, than tho 
; for we mny HuppoKetiicbleHKedneKBtohctho 
ee, not wo mueh of not walking in tho counsel 
of Uto wicked at some particular irtntant of time, as of 
not having walked, or of not having Itfum In tho habit 
of walking, at any ono period of life- 

Tho pnoterito in tied for tho imperfect in hypo- 
thetical sentence*, although tho future IH much more 
frequently mot with in such cages ; na, <+am >oop r j| 
^001 we should haw been like unto tiodom, Isaiah I 9. 
In a eoitditional sentence the pluperfect is likewise indi* 



SYNTAX OF VERBS. 163 



oated by the preterite form ; as, > jo 

and except the Lord had left to w, Isaiah i. 9, 



Use of the Future* 

The future is occasionally found in the place of the 
present ; as, <QJ| >u It^l? l~ffl>'Q2 he caitseth them 
to inherit (or giveththem) thrones of glory, 1 Sam. ii. 8. 
See also Isaiah Tltii. 17. 

The future also occupies the place of the prat in 
a few instances ; as, Ut* louSL |=L^ God hath chosen 
anew thing, Judg. v. 8; |>*2u P l-So5o |SLJD sword 

* i> 7 * 7 

and spear were not seen, ib. ; >OQS] *>taoj ^ I stood 
in my place, Hab. ii. 1 ; ^Jojl P^ S^/br^ fAa^ I formed 
thee, Jer. i. 5 ; lls^ ^i ^oai p^ S^/b^ thou earnest 
forth from the womb, ib. In the two last places the 
prseterite is indicated by the particles connected with 
the respective verbs. 

The fut. is almost always used when the verb im- 
plies something , conditional or potential; and this is 
done sometimes with and sometimes without any ac- 
companying particles. Hence it includes all those 
forms of speaking, where in English we use x one of the 
auxiliary verbs, may, can, let, would, &c. ; as, *4XJ 
t&jud may the evil (of the wicked) come to an end 9 Ps. 

X 

vii. 9 ; V^W> <**&J U^QSOTZ niay the life of the child 

my < 

return, 1 Kings xvii. 21 ; w^tujsu he would deliver hits* 

TS2 



SYNTAX OK VEttBK. 

H. xxil 9 \ yioo*u let them &hew Miw, Fsaiali xix* 12 ; 
oU ^ji (firm wmjwt freely ct, Gen. il 1C. 

A prohibition in fiyriac, as in llchrow, is invariably 
by iho future ; as, V*>I p lAou s/^ ,0tf 
, Lo. /tfr w/ Con. xlvi. 3; ^o^cl p ttow shall 

till, or, rfr; ml kill, Excxl xx, 13 ; -aju^o2 p </MMI 

* 

nol wll wf, i*e. cfo w/ w ww, Euth i. 20. Tlio 
impor. in somotimoR dof 1 by tlio fut. when there 
i no prohibition; AH, ]tow Ion4 //i ///^^ 5<? %W, 
(Jon. !. 8* Tin* partwloH > and p> wo often connected 
with iho ful. whim a polontial Hignifloation is in- 
; a, <*& ^ij ^1? /A"/ *^ would ffrant to him 
e, l>n, ii. K>; yoVAJ? |5* tltt/ttfipy may nol hearken^ 
. xi, 7, Tlw* prefix o ftotwi'nwm ffivos this force 
to the visrfo ; n, ^^0 tlutt they tuny know 9 Bssok. xx. 
20; ^ayio rtn/ /**y way Mwijlw* Exod* viii 8. 
in ttlo found lifwuic'fl > nH follows j yp^ ^4^ 
my mid wiy M<w thw> Qon. xxvii, 4. 
Other imrtictoi in notno luBtanoem accompany j ; as, 
Bar Hob. Chron. WJO. W, %-Liifl^u^ ^j tta< <% 
w/^/ itoW/^ tf; VHf---^l^ ^ 
although (yo tthnil ay) to thi* mountain that it be 
rwnoccd, Matthew xxi, 21* Tho imperfect conjunc- 
tire Is often formed by moons of the fut, and the 
verb Jo*; n, oow *&!* $i\**4*o that 
were not able, Mark ill 20} lo* yal^Zu? V^> 
Atf wwrity qf the dtp might 1$ 



SYNTAX OF VERBS. 165 

established, Assem. Bibl. Orien. i. 393. 2. So in 

Arab, we have the pluperfect and imperf. formed 

*- ^ 
by putting the prseterite of the verb J6 before the 

<* Ss> * -* 

prat, and future of another verb ; as, \^3$ ^ Tie had 

f tot*" s ** 

written; L--*& J& he was writing, See Stewart's 
Arab. Gram. p. 64 

A future is often expressed in the way of peri- 
phrasis. A participle and the fut. of the yerb ]ooi 

sometimes come together having the force of the fut. ; 

? * * 
as, ^r^o ^ooou they shall send, Assem. T. III. 

p. 347. ^^cn l&^a ^ofri <ooou these words shall go 
forth. Departure of my Lady Mary from ttia world, 
p. ,j. 1. 3, by Dr. W. Wright. 

The word ^^ similarly to the Greek /*Ax is some- 
times joined to a verb in the infin. with ^ , and the 
two ezpress jointly the future tense ; as, >onSnS ^ r Zii, 

Z X 

we shall stand; perhaps ice shall shortly stmd ; 
literally, we are about to stand, Horn. xiv. 10. See 
Schaaf s Lexicon under t*Ax Sometimes the future 
of the verb following is found instead of the 
with the prefix ? and occasionally without it, as, H 

77*' * ' 

^*aAi> shall glorify* So says Agrell; Supp. p. 21. 
But it seems to me that c*=ljj has rather the force of 
the inftn. The expression consequently should be 
rendered, is about to glorify, where the idea of inci- 
pient future time is contained in t*j^. John xxl 19* 
"We have a fut. with j prefixed in such'a construc- 
tion as the following; as, 



SYNTAX 01? VEftBS. 



ilatth. ii. 22, whore wo KCO the fut. is employed, 
when in EntfliKh wo should uso the iuf. See ib, 
xvi. 8 ; Murk i. 15, (? 7 j Luke xiii. 11 ; i Cor. 



ii. 



fttflnUire. 

An infinitive oonwvtcd with a finite verb adds 
intensity io it, or drnotw wlial is si^n if ted by tho verb 
to 1)0 wrftfiti, Ji.ml <r WHthnwl ; as, 1^] ol^ai J 
ir!tlffwn/lff Mut/i/dy, (J( k n. xxii, 17; ^oZa^z zciio p 
/A- w//^// UH/ */w/// r//V B (Urn. iii, 4,; |on ^ i^ hath 
fitvw nwHwMy thyiMwl, (inL Hi, 1, 

WlH'ti ntt iiiHnithc is t?(vtrnod by some verb aig. 
nifvin^ //vV/, /w/r,y, cir WMunnnti it IMS generally V N pre- 
flxcnl 5 ftH, v* f po| ^-xi 



A; /v/wn ///f /w/ f John xiv. 6 5 

<;' wttt him to f<wl tuning Luke xn 15 ; 

Jem ^o v^l Iw wmketl fa ttltty him, Matth, 
xiv 5, 

AIW the wrh Ja Iho iitr. \vith ' ? . nuty be rendered 
in EngUnh by ilw iKu-ticiplt*; UH, ojv^ |t^^ ]OCDO 
flt//^/ /A// A'M /<?</* wtthtff) (Jon, xv. 12, 

f rito amo n^inu'k in applied) lo to &A 9 when it in 
employed us )c is lu tho preceding example: as, 

' * V C' * * **V- t jr * 

IjfiUA f*^ cruLCo flr.BCila.\ &A ^maJ^ ///? & #01 adding 
to //, or faMnfffim it, Px k elr, iii. 14, 



SYNTAX OE VEBBS. 167 

It is not unusual for the infinitive to be found in 
connection with other particles besides the Lomad 
prefixed to it, giving to the said infinitive a participial 
effect ; as, jZUfo lio^? ^c ots they ceased from 

btiildwg the city, Gen. xi. 8. oNJsaNj ^ focn jli j] 
he hath not ceased from praying, Assem. T. I. p. 36. 

Use of the Imperative. 

The imperative is not only employed to express 
a command^ but also an exhortation, admonition or 
permission; as, John xi, 15, ^c^ oa^ci g&%e hither. 

JH 

See also Mark i. 38. 

The imper. of the verb |) is frequently found in 
connection with a finite verb in the fut. tense ; thus, 
lfi!o yucj \L V*cno md now come, we will make a 
covenant, i.e. and now come, let m make a covenant, 
Gen. xxxi. 44; ^fa o2 come, we will go, John xi. 7. 

X 

We have also the imper. in such constructions as 
the following 3 I will gweyou h<e best of the fandof 
Egypt* lW? *icA o^oslo and eat ye (i.e. ye shall eat 
of) the f at of the land, Gen. xlv. 18 ', oLo op^ )joi 
this do, md live, Le. (this do, and ye shall Iwe,) Gen. 
xlii. 18. 

An imperative is occasionally found in connection 
with a participle; as, Z\j] f^ ^^4 cease, be th<w still, 
Mark iv.' 39, It may be that *J^ the imper. in- 



108 SYNTAX Ol 1 Vl'JKBS. 

fluoneos the word which follows, and renders the ex- 
profuuon of tho Hiibstnntive verb unnecessary, it being 
ordinarily used with a participle when an imper. is 
intended, In uttering a command it is natural not 
to UHO mow words than arc necessary. The same 
construction may be cxsn in Assem. 3Jil)L Orient. 
T. f. p. W, 



The |Kirtici|>lr is Uwelcss, <->. if lias no Ihno of its 
own, liut |Kirlnk*H of every (hmuvith which it may 
bo connrdtsl Thus, pirn must frc^^tu^ntly. Tho ful.; 

an. O9t 1-*^*^ M<r.<i>,ff ^^u^Ccs 001 |icn ^.Aljo Thewfom 

i* * * 

//// vibick Kht'lt IM torn of HIM in holy, Luke i. JJ5 ; 
|p ^ f^ y^iul % /'{/r* ^//^// 6m/* to Ihcc (/, 
(ien. xvii. 1!K The- pra 1 !-.; UH t JkhoUl thmr Lord, 
l&c*/tf<M r/wr/ rf/wrf, J uclgoM, iil 25* Parti- 
when tlwy aw* l-k< an Hitcli^ and not for the 
ti'nw 1 , liav placed before them for the most 
part tint jmdidi 1 p or tkc pr< k (ix ? ; HH, UD ^pl^o p 
fto trtuuterlttff /WM hwiM to hou^ 1 Tim. v. 13; 

c&!? ^oi^ |>^ ho saw Jrtti sitting, Mark ii. 14 

4*1* thing w BUM, (tof. )I1, i subject to tho same 
ion j a, & p $v& <nJouo <r;icJI he gwe U&r 
UM, Act \K. 41. 
find a parUdplA umirping aB it were tho office 



SYNTAX OE VEIUBS. 169 

of an inf. after verbs of beginning and continuing, of 
permitting and commanding, and also of power ; as, 

POA S;-N^ o*f* ttgy S^aw plucking the ears, L e. 

* * 
they began to pluck, Matth. xii. 1 ; ^> OOOSA 

<oou$z permit both of them to grow (growing), Matth. 

* o * 7 

xiii. 30; ^il QSOSU.O and permit (him) fo (70 (going), 
John xi. 44 ; ^ ]i^D oxS $i| command her to assist 
(assisting) me, Luke x. 40; <QJ| ^*1 w*a/| jh ^| ^o 
ttai 7*^ was not able to recewe (receiving) them, 
Mark ii. 2. 

The active participles are in some instances found 
in the constructive state; hut which are rendered 
into English as if they were in the absolute state. 
In such cases they are followed by a noun; as, 
lao cA^a descending the ditch, i.e. into the ditch> 

^ 9 7 S 

Prov. i. 12 ; 1^5 Z i^]^ enter mg m at the gate, Gen. 
xxiii. 10 ; laoicj J^^ knowing the law, Kom. vii. 1. 

Active participles sometimes govern the noun 
which follows, and in the same manner and using the 
same partible as the verbs from which they are.de- 
rived ; as, <n!L ]+> u-f* lie begem upbraiding him, Bar 
Eeb. Chron. 328. 3 ; ^ loL dwelling m me, Eom. 

* V*7 A V*C 7 

vii. 17, 18, 20 ; pois IAIIHD ^ocn-i^o and destroying 
all the men, Bar Heb. Ohron. 39 1 ?. 1. 

Similarly passive participles observe this gbvem* 
ment ; as, l^co .4.nb. clothed with linen* Ezek. ix. 2 j 



170 SVXTAX or VISILES, 

ft / v 

l*Atain ^o Mwhited with oil, Lev. ii, ! |j ^ 

//WM qf WMic'ity Malth. xi. 11. 

Although in Syriac ilio use of participles is very 
grunt, yet in translating (hwk books into Syriac they 
KomctimcM r<*nd( k r a CJm*k par(ici]>hj by a Syriac verb, 
especially where the Oreel; participle is followed by a 

verb, in which case the two verbs in Syriac luivo tho 

* v * 
flamoinood, icnse, and person; aw, ^^^^ o^ iropcvOwT^ 

{fyrtiirfWi t/f>, <";///////v\ Malih. ii. S; jo^a] ^]f t 
vrfKHrKtiwifiM, J trill ////, / /^vV/ iwxli![j (him), ib. ; \t 

I'artieiLiles are employed to cxprcsw a gradual but 
continual progress or decline of w hat is denoted by the 



. t . * f V 

verb in the H'lttenec; as 7 



Mff, i.o. gradually 
and continnally, <icn. viii. ;i; o^o ^i) [A^o mid the 
hnj fftritiff <iitt{ gtvwhiff* l.c*. was cfontinuully 
1 Smu. ii, ;2<i> 



TV/it futfH'r/wt fttnt 

If, is wlnlotl in JiS how HMW*. tfitMON uro formed. 
ofthc Iniprrfcct arc (ho following |cq ^il 
/YW/, Mai Ih, ii. ',) ; U 

if&iM'iillfi', ib. Ji. 20; Ltom ;< 
/d!, Actu xx* 2K 4 KxnittplcK of the Vlup<*rfect 

' ; l^, MI^X : " Aurh <*huo )om Mattlu iu. /I, 



in 

f * * * 

J. In toy <*n|i) <rtlut IVHchit(*, liowiivoi', it in 



SYNTAX OF VERBS. 171 

* 7 * * 

]oqi oij4*] fs. jmLoZ /or astonishment had taken him, 
Luke v. 9 ; ooai ai^ they had gone up, John iv. 8 ; 
IOOT ~i>^f 7a<? A0d! retired, ib. v. 13; Zooi Zooi &ad 
ie0w, ib. iii. 25. Occasionally the prseterite has the 
force of the pluperfect. In Matth. i. 24 we have 
\+f&> owfLo cnS fAS* l^Lf t=^ ^ ^<^ ^^ the angel of 
the Lord had commanded him. 

The prsaterite, however, followed by the substantive 

* 

verb Ion does not always make the pluperfect \ but 
only the prseterite, or imperfect ; as, |ogi *+$+ he began, 

Mark i. 45 ; IOCPI ]ocn p ]Lz\ the twne was not, ib. xi. 13. 



Joel, u| and 

X 

In addition to what is said of these verbs in sections 
33 and 34, we subjoin the following remarks. The 
substantive verb ]o<ji seems to be employed in some 
passages for the purpose of giving emphasis to them ; 
as, ^AS.SQSn ^pj) fs^Joai Vfor it was not ye $pea7cing, 
Matth* x. 20. Hoffinan says these words may be 
more ao6turaitely ^expressed by the Erench ; oe fa'est 
pas vows, qui parlent. ^} ]y\*\ ^^ IOCT P^ that it 
was not concernwff the bread I spake, ib. xvi. 11. It 
is not unusual for lom }J to express a negative put 

pp 7 0P0 & 

interrogatively ; as, U^? *P \*<n low P is not this the 
carpenters son? Matth. xiii. 55. See also Mattiu 
xx. 25 ; Luke xi. 40, 
looi is pleonastic in some instances, ^e. it is made 



SYNTAX 01? VEUBS. 

no account, of in iho translation of the passage in 
which i( occurs ; as, cupZj }ik>|5 ciilk ]ocn p paiio ]!&] 
M<? /mw rt//tf fa'/vta /cm? 0/ created with the earth, 
Eplivuim T. I. p- 21- *l iVwro of the New Testament 
is translated bv lo^o, > OT o being usually prefixed to 
the following verb; as, oi]o l*^> licul* ]ocno and it 
IKMM to yaw on tkr eighth thy that they came> Luke 
i, 5!)* In wmio ilnct i s n< i ith(r ? nor o is prefixed to 
the fnilmvinur verb; UN, **.CA* \l] ^wai Itoao ICOTO wc/ 
it flute (ft ftttHft />/ tlnwti tfttff* JtixiM e<nw 9 Mark i. 9. 
*-UVwT is passed over in iho Syriac vor- 
\vUliMiit un> untiee, Seo Mnith. Sx. 10; Murk 
iv. I; Luke ii, HI The impiTfect ienso of lorn is 
rormeil l 4 v plaein^ it aHer JSu) \vith tluuiflixto the 
Irtllcr n^reeiiin; in Bender and number with tho noun 
or pronoun \\ith \vtiielt it in coinu^icd See 31. 
&1 is, It<>vve\ifr, occiiHtotuilly round without an affix; as, 

a 

jn+ ]$ ^t cca I*] MM lAnw were *wen brethren, 
Mutth. xxii. Si5 |ccn in ohncrvcd in a few instances 

before in^tctul of after M ; as, ^qioJu] |om U 

* * 

Bnv lleb, j>, {)t, lino 7. SomotimcB ]ooi diRap- 

ptntrn and Lit itself in made to cxpWHH \mi tiruo; as, 



young child ir<M, M at !h. i! 0* A^iiin, although as -a 
ral< k , dm ImpCM'rct'fc Tcitno nffn^CH with its subject in 
^cndei* ii ad number; yet toa 2u] in to bo met with in a 
without any regard to tbis tkgroonumi ; as, 



SYNTAX OF VERBS. 173 

Joji Zuj l2o=yX^s there was enmity, Bar Heb. 288, 
line 4 ; although we have 'in John ix. 16, 
ji there was a division. We have also 

0$ #*<? third how, Mark xv. 25, |ogi 
were mcwz-y things, 2 John, verse 12. 

composed of P and 2u| takes the affixes in the 
same way as M (see 34), and when followed by 
Lomad with a pronominal affix signifies to have not\ 
as, <A aAj ^i^ who hath not, Matth. xiil 13- See 
also Luke ii. 7 ; John iv. 17. It has usually j prefixed. 

Regimen of Verbs. 

A transitive verb exercises an influence over a noun 
or pronoun which follows it, either immediately or 
mediately, and which limits its signification. The 
noun or pronoun may he with or without a preposi- 
tion; as, fO^ DX^CD If^o^Z he made many disciples, 

John iv. 1; UO^D ^^os l*io, What has Moses com- 
manded you? Mark x. 3; ja^'i^M; ^at I may call 
the riffhteous, Mark ii. 17. 

Verbs which are doubly transitive, such as transi- 
tive verbs in those conjugations which are causative, 
exercise this influence over two such nouns or pro- 
nouns ; as, l^o^ 1-loa^ onr-i^V he commanded him to 
be clothed with a garment" of fine Imen, Gen. xli. 42 ; 

l^L^ f^v 1^ <^^V) he taught the people knowledge* 
! 

Eccles, xii. 9. 



171- SVXTAX OF vnrs. 

The* passive conjiigniions of vorlw oflontimcB ex- 
press ihe cause or motive of action l>y tho jmrtiolo ^ 
in fcomo *meh manner as iho following; ^coui ^pv*zL 
t/nil yc wtty hi* */vw ft// /A/'/w, Mutth. vi. 1. p^Li 001 
{cu& /7 ///// fo* /to//// ft// //o/'t ExixL xii. 10. Soo also 
Luke viii. il); John viii. !W; AHn xv. 21; xviii.18. 
In the winin wnsu I ho jnvpositiou ^o is used; as, 
\Lti ^ p>*] ///' inm //v/ A// ///f* /i/>//v7 t Matllt. iv 1. 

Ii IK noi unftr|uonl thai, vorlw in lh ]>assivo con- 
jutynlitMis hnvn tho (bn'<* of active coiyufpiiionH, and 
mhnii mi aociisjiliw; as, p>i| /u* mj/mfawd Iris 
intTi'v* Ly^o i. 51. lit liko inniinorllioptiKKivopnrti- 
riph 1 of tla* poal cxMiju^ation has in many voi'lm the 

ftmii of tin* active participle; nw, cni^ cc ^*j-**l /Acy 

* * " * 

Iwk ft! M, Mailh, xiv. fi; anii ^'^t-* Hni'MMMtinff him, 

Mnttli, viii. 1H. So also ya!i fwitttlniiif^Tiim 1 8 ; 

twyiuffi Litko vli. 1 !; A.c.iHiii. 2j 
/ Cr!ton* Hpicilc^iiun, p. va!i lino 2ft* 



/lw wW/(r Mmbx with <tr tr it/tout ft 

H is not uncommon to si-d two V<T!>H coining togc.- 
t ono of \vhi<*h |u*rforuiA tho ofltoo of an adverb to 
the other, ouch verb bohtg in tho sumo number, Bonder, 
and Ic-nw^, an, ^'>^* u*^x]> f^o //## ^/^ ww^A 2 Cor. 

viii, 15 ; <niifi*> ^^otf //rr/A grwtly watted him, Phil 
* * 

iL II j jol |L| yo5tl / w7/ ayah fasti % jbo^ Gcn f 
XJCK, Ul ; *lo ^ooj y/^> //c 1 ^^/, Luke, xx. 11, 12; 



SYNTAX OP VEEBS. 175 



entreated <p9o^ ^scta ^aoZAj p tfAdtf W should 
not be spoken to them any more, Hebr. xii. 19 ; ^i^] 
Ui^3 CTLSU^AO 7&e changed the letter craftily > Bar Heb. 
p. 100. 

There are instances in which the second verb is 
found in the infinitive, the inflexion of the first de- 
pending on circumstances ; as, ]v*^> uaaaoil P shall 
no more see> Job vii, 7 ; NP ou^SsoS 002 ^coo] p I 
will not any more curse the ground, Gen. viii. 21; 
>l^ ^sifflQio again they say, Assem. T. III. p. 56, 
col. \.line 20. 

The second verb is occasionally found in the future 
with 9 prefixed ; as, *-$$LA.ZJ La^jo (the suspicion) was 
near to tie confirmed i.e. (the suspicion) was almost 
confirmed, Bar Heb. p, 551, line 11. 

The participle of the second verb is found, as we 
might expect, as well as any other inflection of it ; 
as, which book he desired oiL ]*> cnizta j that he read- 
mg it, might admire, i.e. that he might read it admir- 
ingly, Assem, T. II. p. 345, line 31. 

Miscellaneous Observations. 

The ordinary method of expressing a reciprocal or 
reflective sense is by a transitive verb with the noun 
liaa united to the affixes. But it is also in some 
instances done by means of the passive conjugations. 
In the Ethpeel; as, tia] he turned himself, Matth, 
ix. 22. See also John viii. 6, 7, 59. 



170 RYKTAX OF VERBS. 



VH'bshzivo Komrtimos a passive signification ; 
as, ]!*4 to iMMtlff, for lo Ic dccekefl, trhavaveat, Luke 
xxi. S; JL/tf'/ww/, Tor IMS burnt, Matth. xiii. 30: 

" K * 

,/?>//, for te f/Ytf tffflrf rfflwi, John iii. 24; 
twtutMf, for fc^ Ml/vcted, was lorn up, as 

by ihcir roots. 
Thoro is no form of tlin v(rl> expressing the Opta- 
livn mood. 3<\>r ihis purpose tlie future of the 
Imlictilm* (SCM* fh usn of il Jut* p. 303) is ordinarily 
WiwI, the nmtesf or homo pnrticlo dotormining that 
this wiiM' of Ihr vorl> is r(quir<i The pronoun 
M M k rvM ihinpurpoAn; as 10} ^D docs in 
'iww in NtiinbrrH xi. 20 wo have ^ ^o 
///ff/ r/// ///^ jfJ^fe o//? 
ij^ ix. 20: cn,^*| ^j ^i 

v* r Jj poi IfrftvN O ///<// /A/ir iMQi*fo 1WM ffivw into my 
: ioc in found (o indicate thoOptativo mood; 
w* *///*/ r/i> fix. xvi. 3. Hotewx and 
Imvft wiltatttwl pufisn^cfl in which ono of the 
, woi, IA employed to de- 
noi< 4 fit in mood. 

Compound words in (ironk arc translated into Syriac 
by Himplo wonln, either alono or in conjunction with 
another word or pm*tteto ; as, ^<I foreknowing, Acts 

xwl. ft } A^l ^t ' fw^^f Mark xttL 23 ; ^<nJ 

* * * * 

m&Djo //<- w>j ft^w Ww or <We/ onlw* Urn, John* 
xx. 4 ; o with many others. 



SYNTAX OF ADVERBS. 177 

57. Syntax of Advert*. 

The repetition of adverbs, like that of nouns, ex- 
presses intensity ; as, ^A-S **+s very "badly : or 

* 

diversity ; as, t^o ]* hither <md thither : or con- 
tinuation ; as, ^Jifl ^ J^> by little and little. 

X * 

Adverbs are used to qualify nouns by being placed 
sometimes before them, and sometimes after them ; 
as, l-i ^Ao a little water 9 ]&IDCU ^>^o a few days, 

* X 

|vS^yj ,^co many widows, Luke iv. 25 ; 

^ X 

a little lecwen, I Cor. v. 6. When ^-^a and 

* 

are put before nouns, they seem themselves to be 
nouns, or to have the force of them, and might be 
translated, a little quantity 0fand a great quantity of 
respectively. 

Adverbs derived fcom the names of nations ending 
in M are found sometimes with and sometimes 
without a prefix; as, M^oiio, or M^om Syriace ; 

X X 

or Iula|/j Arabice. So we have MJO!D, or 

X 

r&ke, T^^o^s, or 2u^Uo^ JEjpyptiaM. 
An adverb is expressed by means of a noun with * 
prefixed ; as, }te>* a moment of time, l&^t? imme- 
diately, ]iDQA ^aj daily. Again, an abverb is formed 
by a noun with o prefixed; as, Uo^ua astutely, 
]i<&*^ > craftily, ]l\La lastly 9 
Iz&thso diffusely. 



KVXTAX OK 



S8. Syntax nf Prepositions. 

Pfl'iwwil i< ms aw* mnployod in conned ion with, verbs ; 
thus o is found \vitU verbs Biguifyiiig to confess or 
>//'////; also many verbs of HCIIHO arc construed with 



9 * 

trto Ml (It'Hy me, onlotoD W j] /^ ww? 
in uw?d with V<V!>B 



or twwHrifi ; ns V^ji ^ ''-^ P? ^o 

//// the rfw^ t Jcilin x, ], 2. 
ivith vtrl< of wrwtttf? or commanding ; as, 
V^ Af* wwrnlt JUflith. Kvii. 5 j fid 7/t* 
(1mm. xxstvl. 2. 

whh vi*rhn of wtHtwthtff or 
f/W MiMwfptl POJU*^ Jtmcui ius between 



with Vf*r1iH of twninffg n, U] //(? <?<m/ Mark 
K 7 : of //"% ; iw **ll *f rfi/w//W, John vi, 2 ; ^i; 
A<? rww, 1 Oor. x*v. 1 

The pn'jHmilions v Vaa^ ^ww/,^* agaimt) >oL 
t^/VA* aiul many others nro fmjuontly ucd with verb* ; 
at, )*) ^Acai> (Oicooi p r^t/W no/ evil; Matth. 
v, 30. *8ee frit* Mattlh xivi, 02 ; Act* iv. 14; Bom* 
vii, 23 ; A<'t** xxv. ft ; Hobn vi, 0, Ac* 

The prefix o> ii somotimos nob expressed, but 



SYNTAX OF P&EPOSITIOKS. 179 

understood, before a noun in a state of construction; 
as, c-s] A-a )^joj <QJ] ^tp^a m my -Father's home are 

* X 5"^ 

many mansions, John xiv. 2. See also Acts vii. 20 ; 
xiii. 29. 

The preposition ,10 followed by a noun is found to 
express, by way of periphrasis, an adj., or to give to 
the noun the sense of an adj. ; as, ]!v r* 5 he was 
of the celebrated ones, i.e, he was celebrated, Assem. 
T. I. p. 426. col. 2. last line but one. t&J&ChD p ^o ? o, 
-*? md that which is of the impossibles, ie. and that 
which is impossible, ib. T. III. p. 605. ^i is also 

to be met with as redundant. See Matth. i 12 ; 



ii. 9 ; Assem. T. I. p. 54. 1. 7. This preposition is 

also used as in the following example, |ou >Q*G] cruL 

* 
|^ic L^a ^ao whom God hath raised from among the 

dead. Acts iii. 15. 

After ko and other particles signifying between, 
various particles are used, which in English have the 
force of the conjunction and. 1st. The copulative o 
itself; as, Upo o^ ZUs between interior and exterior, 
Bat He*, p. 473. 1. 3. Us?o5o Uo^la ''Ax^* between 
the armies and the chiefs, ib. 604. 1. 17. 2nd. Lomad 
frequently; as, -nflJop ^ 2us between Haran and 
Edessa, Bar Heb. p. 60. 1. 13. U^ V1 Zus between 
earth and heaven, ib. 275. 1. 5; ]f niraS ^oalu-o 
between you md the sons of the Church, Assem. 
T. III. p. 307. last line. )2*^ rocn^^ between them 
and the waters, Bar Heb. p* 511* 1, 9, 10. 3rd. by 



3 80 CONJUNCTIONS. 

V 5so; as, <psiiw M0iQiJ> between Mm and them* Matth. 
xx. 17* ^o A ZUD between me and tJiee, Bar Heb. 
p. 270, L 19, fL-Ao <pouua between, them and tfo 
nrwy> ib. p. 412. L 10. 

2*9 <!OOH not take an affix ; but tbo affix follows 
with **s profixwl to if ; as, micJJo C& flus between him 
and hi* mother, Bar Hob, p. 507, 1. 16, 17, cni* Zus 
between him <wd the king, ib, p. 421, L 2, 3. 
5^1 lua between Iheu and them, ib. p. 408. 
1. If). 

Whon ]iji. IH followed by the prefix % tlio two 
particle 1m vo th for<*o of mr^M* rt in Latin. ]ooio 

ciZoicik ^ A r^^ ^ /; ^ ^' ^^^ ^'^^ 7 ^^^ ^^ ^^ (of 
Itonwl), Mafih. . 15, 

jlj withtwti laki*H no affix ; but when a pronoun 
follows, it in a neparato pronoun ; afl, ]j] p> without 
we, John xv. 5. 

A noun called by A#rdl nomen nitdum, 1.0. a noun 
without proilxcB or afllxo.s, IB xiaod as a proposition ; 
n lij^r, Bnr Mob, p. 203, hint lino; *-^su >Z]/or my 
^ r 3 ) ^/ ^j U** <pl ^ investigation^ ib, 
p, 59, 1, 8. 

50. Conjunctions. 

A conjunction !* on many occasions not expressed 
in a Kmtenco, but understood, Tho conjunction o 
as, 



CONJUNCTIONS. 181 

Matth. ix. 7. <-ooa >oo0 Arise, go, Gen. xxxi 13. 
y*S^p \i ySoi ysoD #n$g #?#?& (and) ^0 o# tf% ,/eetf. 
Acta Mart. II. p. 293. See also Is. xxxvii. 37. In 
the two last examples the Vau would naturally drop 
out, as commands are often given under the influence 
of excitement, and consequently in as few words as 
possible. We have also an ellipsis of oj in 2 Kings 
ix. 32 ; ^iSnVuiSs ]&Sz, ^3L two or three eunuchs. 
See Isaiah xviii. 6. <J is sometimes understood; as, 

]&9\> oil* -*>KT?O and (if) tribulation should happen to 
x * ^^ ^ ' ** 

him, Gen. xlii. 38. 

Vau is often found prefixed to each word, or step 
of the sentence ; as, >^>o ^ioZ]o ILLoo ^ojoa ** 
1Sfi4\ ^CL^O Our Saviour suffered, and died, and was 
buried, and arose, and ascended to heaven. Bar Heb. 
p. 51, last line. In explanation of this liberal use of 
the Vau, Hoffman in his Gram., p. 383, note, says, 
"Animo commotis etiam polysyndeton interdum 



A conjunction is repeated when the clauses of the 
sentence to which the said conjunction is appended 

ore used correlative!^; as,o o,Bx.xxi. 16; *ai 

*aj, Gen. xxiv. 25; <] <], Horn, i 16; .. r ...o] 

o], Matth. vi. 24. Different conjunctions are fre- 
quently employed in a sentence in this correlative 

manner; as, \&9\ y*], Is. Iv, 9; >]> y4 M ...,J26tfi, 

Acts i. 11; Jo <j, 2 Oor. xii. 2; 

Eev. x il 2. 



CONJUNCTIONS. 



The particle *, besides being a pronoun and a mark 
of the Gen. is also used as a conjunction. When it 
has tho force of that. i.e. when it is causal, it is 
construct ocl with a verl) in the future ; but when it is 
used in another senso, it may be found with a prate- 
rlta. Sue Mitt tit. L 22; ii. 8, 12, 15. &c. It is 
found in connection with many other particles ; as, 
! ! fdKM<r f Malih. vi. II). >&]^ wheresoever. 
Bar Hob. p. JWH, 1. 10. > L1 as that, John viii 28, 
^Z^cf w/v/ that, !1>, y t*msi fcwuw*, Bar Hob. 112, 
linen 7, R > jLs iy/?<r M</<, ib, 3D, 7- ? 3 to ^i, 
JUfttth. xx vi, 28; Lulco xxiL 20. > ]i wto, Mark 
iv, 20, ? '*^o fc^fffw, Mflr Jacob's Scholia, p 1, 
1.3. ?'*! twwtttCi War Hcb. 158, 12. There are 
lttian(50 in which the conjunction * is omitted, $ ^>|| 
(101 fOj| J00 (tliat) / wmy <?^A jb^ John xxi. 3. 
Hero !H aloofly itn ollipHiB of y Iwforo jp^f. 

The copttlutivo o imn tho force of that; especially 
aftw vorlw of aM#ff or wmwandlng, Epliraim T. I. 
p. 81, J? , 7 ; p. 410, D. 8, 0. In Job y, 7, o has the 



There aro otlior conjunctions, which have oxcep- 
tlonal uHCrt. o] i employed in making a comparison, 
and thu it 'porfonna the office which is usually 
nwdgned to ^P; a t "it flhali be more tolorablo for 
Tyro and Bidon in the clay of judgment ,-& J\ thm 
for you: 1 Matth. xL tt. 

is uod with a formula of imprecation; as, " God 



INTERJECTIONS. 183 



do so to thee, and more also, )2u& ~&o IJQDO^ $ ifthau, 
conceal from me a tlvmg" 1 Sam. iii. 17. " David 
sware, saying, So do God to me, and more also, 
li^oi oj> >ojo ]4i*S >oLJ <] if I taste bread before 
the sim be down" % Sam. iii. 35. See also 2 Kings 
vi. 31. Cant. i. 9. P J the same as Vh DN has the force 
of yea, verily > in Job. ii. 5, and elsewhere. 

60. Interjections. 

Interjections which denote threats have commonly 
the preposition ^ following ; as, Eccles, x. 16, ^-a^ ~o 
woe to thee. Matt. -T"i- 13, ^Q^ ^o woe to yqp. 1 Sam. 
iv. 8; ^ MO woe to us. See Matth. xiii. 7 ; yri"- 13. 
Sometimes the preposition is ^^; as/Jer. L. 27, *o 
^ocruS^, ^o^ to them; or, ^ according to Amira, 
Gram. p. 449, l^oi l^f*- ^ tno] wo^ to this generation. 
When interjections are employed to express lamenta- 
tion, the nouns which follow do not receive a prepo- 
sition ; as, M^P 010] alass my dwghter 9 Judges xi. 35, 
See 1 Kings xiii 80 ; Eev. xviii. 10> 16, 19. 

^1 is a particle of invoking aa well as of affirm- 
ing. See Gen. xxx. 34. ^o2u[ O that is almost 
always joined with the particle ^; as, ^*> tao&*1 
wA ^oZuoji ^(-limsn that ye would bear with me, 
% Cor. xi. 1. , See also Gal. iii. 4. 

|oi behold I This interjection serves to mark em- 
phatically the sentence, or that part of the sentence, 



18'1 INTEHHOGATIVES. 

at the beginning of which it is placed. It is used 
especially whero teMfitt or vicis is signified ; as, ^ij 
0iZcui4 ^ 1 *& iMtailh to him, Mold, from Us child- 
honJ, Mark ix. 21. "That ihou hast smitten me 
^osj &lz ]m IwfioM, three tiwes" Niimb. xxii, 28. In 
the Ntnv Testament ?m is often found as the translation 
of tliu Greek particle >/5^ ; as, ^cua jl^J f<n ^ ^^ ^ 

Maltlu iii. 10. With JJ preceding, |oi is 
interrogatively. See Itatlh. v. 46. 

h$ //, is cmiHtrucd with ^ of the person and 
prefixed io flie vcrhj us, piS> cnS uxu/w i^> ^ 
(fail he nhouhl do, Job. xxxiv, 10* See Matth* 



Sometimes iiin verb in in tlie, infin, with V X prefixed, 
Beo Gen, xlir. 7. Iwhlcttd of > the conjunction <j is 
found in 1 Bum. xxiv. 7, &e. ^00^ 7^/// It is the 
same an *7f8 in Hebrew* It Ls found with a plu, 
affix, although tho ninpilat !N occasionally mot with, 
and a noun with ^> following, to which tho affix of 
the inteiji!<;tion rafara, Se Maltlh v- 3; Pfi* i 1 
Somrtirnt'K tho noun iw without V S. See Deut, 
xxxiii. 20, 



Question* arn n^ked not only by interrogative 
pronoun* ; but alo by various particles, such a* 
U*-l //^o / llicu'j ^e frwn whence? or whcref&& 
Tbwe wo many Jatemgative ientonoe0, which hftve 



INTERBOGATrVES. 185 

no particle to mark them; but which the context 
shews to be. In these cases the prominent word in 
the question commonly begins the sentence : 001 LJ] 

]oou> ^o art thou the kmg of the Jews ? Matth. 
xxvii. 11. 

A question with J3 ordinarily comprises an affirma- 
tion; as, ]>L* )2| ^^ ]L=>)] )LS9 -*G\ <p2uj P say not 

^ x ae - 

ye that after four months cometh harvest ? John iv. 35. 
When, however, a question is asked by li^ a negative 
is implied; as, o*2LaLo^ ] tVwr p- x - J-^^^n |Q^ |^S g is a 
devil able toopen the eyes of the bUnd ? Job x. 21. Some- 
times a doubt is implied; as, *+> \i] \^ Lord, is it 
If Matth. xxvi. 22. See also John ix. 27 ; xviii. 25, 
The last remark is applicable to the particle *o when 

it is used interrogatively ; as, ^ |Zailacn <^o .^4^0 
^ ' __ 

pj] and shall Hejindfwth on the earth ? Luke xviii. 

8. The particle <] is employed to express what 
Uhlemann calls indirekte Frage; as, that thou tell 
us jau^j ofip IMJ^V) 001 L] <J whether thou art the 
Christ, the Son of*Goti ? Matth. xxvi 63. 
The interrogation is sometimes continued by means 

of the disjunctive o| to make, it would seem, the 
question more distinct and definite ; as, jjoi |^u 01^0 

7 P 7 V 

<^oiooo) o| who hath simed f this mem or his parents ? 
John ix. 2, > i omSn 001 ~*i*t)] o] \i}) 001 001 LJ| art thou 

^ x - ' if ' 

*^ tf&atf Aow^ (?o^, or cfo we look for <wotfteff 
Matth. xi. 3. See also Assam* T, I. p. 87. 



180 EXALLAGE OF PEKSOSS. 

The affirmation or denial of a question is usually 
madnliykocpiugkick tho verb and pronoun, which 

dt'ftno the question; as, .... ZjScjJ yo'ji ^Lj foZcsi* 

/ * * * Y - * " ^ 

jLfa]) yjjloio ^i*LcL*, oficjo /WM //* 7w/W, my brethren, 

t/wf, irlifcfi I hnn* mM ! And I hay amwcrcd, We have 
Itrttf'd envy thing vhkh thon haul said. Assom. T. 
L p. 375. 1 7. 



* ftf /' 

The enallnjye of persons dom not occur so fre- 
quently in Byrinct a in Hebrew, and especially as 
in the JM>n*w TsjilinH ; but *omo instances are 
mot with in the Hyruut HeripturcB ; OH, lui ^4^ 
mpl (tj> lllp o] ilop uaaio ^ &A wfwwfore tlm 
art itWMUwhl<\ wwi who jwlgeth his MighloWi 
where we bave mya* for ^p* Bom, ii 1, i.<?. the 

3rd petwn for Die 2nd 4^0^; y&odt loi 2uL 
lul jl^ fto di2o2^f ^t*? 1M^ r=^ P=^ j ^r w not 
u, (iwl lib* unto {hw*t fwyiriHg iniquity, and yass* 
ing tyt ft** 1 twiitgwwtoto <\f tlw witidne of his in* 
wt and Mntwt nvts whuro wo havo mio^f. 
I, 3rluab vll. 18, .<?, tbn 3rd per. for tho 2nd, 



wlioro wo 

luivn ^OMI fot ^peenZi Gal iv. 21, f,e?. tho 3rd, pom for 
tho 2nd H<*o uho Inuiah xlil 21 



ELLIPSIS. 187 



63. Ellipsis. 

This figure occurs most frequently in the omission 
of the substantive verb ; as, caeca* <JOA,O md his name 
was Joseph. oiZoajj ^^] those who (are) like him, Bar 
Heb. 328. 12. There are other words which it is 
sometimes necessary to supply in order to complete 
the sense ; as, a subs, in Eocles. vi, 3, ]]D l^o^^oj J 
if a man shall beget a hundred, namely sons; Zulcu |^ 
once have I sworn, where ^s) is understood. Psalm, 
Lsxxix. 35 ; <ojiacn; ^a*&a? ^*Loi ^|, ttlso these 
things that were written (were written) that ye may 
believe, John xx. 35. 

There axe very many passages in which a 00/*& of 
some kind or another has to be supplied, in order to 
complete the sense ; as, t*22cji ]^D^ mtil when 9 viz. 
wilt thou bring assistance, Fs. yi. 4; ^5co y& ^^ 
% blessmff (may it come) ^po^ % people, Ps. iii* 9 ; 
1^] )iUo }3a^ fpz ^ destruction qf the impious 
<wd the wicked (will come) together, Isaiah i. 28. 
There are some sentences in which a word requires 
to be repeated, in order to obtain a full and con- 
nected sense; as, JLoftj? ^oou <nLa ^J ]><n but all this 
which was done (was dotie) that it might 
Matth. i. 22. See also John xx. 31 : Bom. r* 
Heb. vii. 18, viii. 3. 



188 COLLOCATION OF WORDS, 

An accusative is sometimes omitted; as, / t 
brought forth> via. sows, Gen. xvi. 1; ^^ h 
viz. a ic /#, Noli. xiiL 25 ; v-ic5) fo mtf, viz. the lot, 

1 Sam. xiv. 42. Also to ^j in John k. 7, some 

*f *" 

such noun a 1^ is to "be supplied, 

A nominal ivo Ls occasionally omitted: as LoX] 

7 * r^^^"* B 

^^ w*W (UiH anger) be retained for ever? 
Jor. iii- 5, Tlusni IB also an ellipsis in the Hebrew. 

A noun cxpreswod in the early part of the sentence 
i not rotated in a following part with some genitive, 
although required l)y the aonso, the genitive alone 

t ' <* <*ff V f ft 

being put? a*, pi ^lo? t*r*"T| v\ ***** &* g^ry as 
(the fflory) r/if//<? ow/// h'flotttM of the Father, John 
L 14, Jn tho (Jm*k *^ in repeated, |om t-.moLl 
Ifkif <nio& ///> clot hi ttff wf(ft (the clothing) qfhafo, 

Matilu Hi. 4. Ju*ol? ^ ^? )Zo>ra ^ 2ul JAa^ ^ 



tti9thMMy 9 w&fak hgrwlwttwn the testimony qfJofa, 
John v. 3(1 In comparisons thia mode of oonstmo 
tion itt prevalcud, of whicli the last example is an in* 
fitanop. An <illii>His of a word expvoHsitig a definite 
portion of time ; us, >oo* a ^, or ]iXx4 a y<?ar 9 is quite 
common. 



In gcwornl the collocation of words in Byriao is 
simple and natural ; but in some instances it departs 



COLLOCATION OP WORDS, 189 

from the ordinary rules. A few of these instances it 
may be well to notice. 

The verbs ]o<n and of are sometimes so placed in 
a sentence that the grammatical connection of the 
former part with that of the latter is dissevered ; as, 
^ T ^ |o<n <-Aiiz p tioioo and Moses was eighty years 

old, Ex. vii. 7 ; oi$l ^ r^\ U^ m d they *ay to 
us, make bricks, Ex, v. 16 ; ^-o* ^rn^o fr fti p lam 
a hundred and twenty years old, Dent. xxxi. 2. A 
personal pronoun standing for the logical copula is 
found placed between two nouns in a state of regi- 
men; as, >o0ipl> ,OM oiL)] toe are the seed of Abraham, 
John viii, S3 

In a long sentence the verb is occasionally found 
at the end of it, and separated a long distance from 

its object; as, p^ fcL^ he made a banquet, 

Ephraim T. II. p. 210. D. 6...E, 3. The verb is also 
found separated by many words from its auxiliary; 

as, li^....,,v*a* y^, <] ifthou art indeed able 

to read, ib. T. II. p. 211. 0. 8...D. 2. j j] jti.^o 
|ocn and he did not wish to be fatigued ; where the 
verb comes before that on which it depends, ib. T. II. 
p. 212. 0. 5, 6. The infinitive with ^ prefixed comes 
before the verb on which it is dependent in Ephraim 
T. I. p. 83. D. 3, 4 

A noun sometimes comes after both the verb and 



100 SYRIAC METRES. 

its object; as, 



~ ti * \ f ^s ' ~ v^ - N^^^ 

for they feared lest the people should stone them, 
Acts. 7. 26. Tho object is found between the auxili- 
ary and the verb in Matth. xxi. 1, and other places. 

There are instances of particles occupying unusual 
places; as the Adverb ZUjli^in Mark i. 45 ; " ''* ? 

h 00 

\> openly to enter the city ; P in ^> 
reprove me not in Mine anger, Ps, vi.2. 



04, Kyriae Metre*. 

According to Halm, tho first hymnologist of the 
Syrians was the celebrated Gnostic Bardesanes, who 
flourished in tho second half of tho second century. 
la this ho is in some degree supported by Ephraim 
in his 5Srd homily, against heretics, T. II. p. 553, 
where, although ho docs hot actually assert that 
Barctoflamss wiw tho iuvontor of measures, yet he 
HpeakB of him in terms which show that he not only 
wrote hymns, but also imply that at least ho revived 
and brought into fashion a taste for hymnology. 
Theso are his words: 



he composed hymn*, and adapted them (mixccfy to 
eoundt; he ako composed psalms, and intro- 



STEIAO METRES. 191 

duced metres, and distributed words ly measures md 
weights. These hymns were, according to the same 
authority, called "by various names, They were de- 
nominated U>'r^ ? which word, according to Castell 
by Michselis, signifies Hymns consisting of mawy 
strophes, l^oli poems, -*fu. songs, and Uf*^i o* If^l 

xx |ac 

Psalms. It is stated that he wrote 150 Psalms in 
imitation of the number of the Psalms of David. 
"Whether the poems bearing the different names here 
mentioned make together the number 150, or whether 
they are comprised in the (4^1 alone, is not cer- 

X 

tain. 

Ephraim says that the heresy of Bardesanes 
became powerful, because the people were taught 
through poetry, and they were consequently influenced 
and charmed by the melody of his numbers. It was 
by this contrivance that he succeeded in infusing his 
poison into the minds of those who were attracted by 
the power of his teaching. He gathered around him 
a company of youths whom he taught to sing to the 
harp. Ephraim says, in T. II. p. 489. D, Uaioos 
]op*^ vMft cnZ^q by the melodies of his Psalms he 
vomited the youth. It is to be regretted that of the 
Hymns of Bardesanes, which it appears, in consequence 
>f their high poetic merit, exercised an extensive 
fatfluen.ee over the religious opinions of the age in 
which he lived, and gave so much strength and popu- 
larity to his gnostic ertore, a very few fragment* only 



102 RVJIFAC METRES. 

remain. Thiw fragments arc <o be found scattered 
ovor <ho workfl of Ephrnim. Jt is to this lioly father 
that we arc indebted for all we know of tho Hymno* 
logy of Bardosanes, and of tin* c<mse it was meant to 
wrve. Jli.s testimony, however, after making some 
alhnvnnoe for lim sw*ai nipunal tho gnoptio heresy, 
wliitih determined him to concentrate all the powers 
of hut mind io put it down, ought for anything we 
know 1o ilie ronlvary, l>o aocc k ptcxl as in the main 



On t!m Bubjwt ofthe ini*trc in which Bardesancs 
wrote vvr ntust <*<>ntiu(* io nprnk on the amo autho- 
rity, At Hi<* fi*t of hymn 05 
(in* tlww wordn P^ 

; M^o^Af //if/v* end HewntMK hyniw to the mea* 
qf the* wng* (if JhmfaaM*. Thcwo hymns are 
numhoriul 19 to M incluniv^ It is a pity that 
thr; l^tHHlictiiMMfdiitou did not arrange thorn metri- 
cally, BO tlmf th^ nitMiHuro of tho verno might bo at 
once prrnratful to the* oycf. Aft or a nhort examina- 
tioit* liow<vr, it may bn H<rt^rtain(?d that those poems 
are irrilton in pontoyll<iWc vcwo, U. och line eon- 
of fivo wyllahlf^ Ilahn, in hia "Bardosanoe 
," p. M, litM j?iv<n the flrnfc utrophe oonsit- 
ing oftmflvo IUHH of tlio >10tli hymn- TIiD twelfth 
lino in nn follows, oo ]s^ ^ai ///^ /<? Atw t&Aa 
wwptwwl tcitk MM. This in a doxology, and auch 
U may he nlmwYed is the butt lino of each airopho of 



METRES. 193 

the poem. It is probable that in the Church service, 
the custom was for the congregation, or the whole 
choir at least, to sing the doxology. In some poems, 
such as the 53rd, the doxology is found only at the 
end of the first strophe ; but in such cases it is most 
likely that it was understood at the end of each of the 
others. There arc other hymns, such as the COth and 
6Jith, that contain no doxology. llahn conjectures 
that in these, the congregation might have used some 
one of the doxologies best known at the time* Some- 
times the doxology consists of two qr three verses, as 
in hymn 50, p. 19, D and E, where wo have, 



Praise to him, who wut him 

13lc3sed be his coming* 

Harmonius, the son of Bardesanes, stands next in 
the history of this subject, both chronologically and 
for his successful cultivation of sacred poetry. He is 
reported to have studied at Athens, and to have be- 
come well acquainted with the literature of the Greeks* 
Some writers have stated that he indeed was the first 
to compose hymns in Syriae, and they assign to him 
the honours, which by on almost general consent 
have been assigned to his father. This statement is 
not in any way confirmed by Ephraim, who, in con* 
sequence of Ms position and of the time in which he 
lived, is undoubtedly entitled to be regarded as the 



ItH SYIUAC METRES. 

greatest authority. It is said that he also trod in the 
footstep** of his father in regard to the gnostic doc- 
trine*, mid thufc in imitation of Bardosanes, ho, too, 
wrote pnefry for ihe purpose of propagating those 
lewts* In AHNpnumi Btbl Orient., Tom. L, p. 48, 
note, is the foltmvini* extract from a Syriao MS. in 
the Vatican on KerleR, Hist. t**jp? ot 

^ S^ fO l&Jku,Z >*,$ ^ )cm 
n y^o ]Ati+9 |fciV.a?r.!^ |ooi 2 
*, tftt* MM tofIhwlMfntM 9 fofuMrly composed 
of />/v*/w /'//// wfming (miring) hk Iwyktyin 
i ht\ //v 'A** wwlium ftf/he w/v/#;w, allured t/te 



How fjtr fheHtiilemoiil of Kphntim (p, 301) may ho 
relieil on it may mil Iw easy loMty, hut it ia evident ifiat 
In* tittuwlf Mir\*il llml I hi* Mtd^HwrnrH wore strongly 
in Ilti(n<jed hy po( ry and music. 'Whdhcr the motive 
IK; imputes to !iat'desan<'.s whioh Ims boon ciuotod, bo 
or not, it Is < ( erluhi that Bphraim also made 
of HUM instrument for eounloractiti^ the baneful 
wluelt Ihe vriiiiii{M of Hnnh'fwines had produced. 
He looked upon thoHr t'H'curtH with groat diHmuy and 
expreHHed lumwlf piinst them in tho Btrong<mttorms* 
In Itin Hfi\ newmipmtyinK IUH work^ Tom, VL p 53, 
by nn unonymotiK author, ho ! ruado to ay: cursed 
i* h<*> who ihnlt ^///, tut fa (liardoitanc^) mid: kt him 
be MwttottM who *hM Mtow, $* he Mtewd &o- Wo 
ant told hy thiH biogrnplH^r what rticana Ephraim 
adopted to bring back tho foibwerH of Bardceancs to 



SYEIAXJ METRES. 195 

the pure doctrines of the Church. He established 
daughters of the convent* lie taught them odes and scales 
of music and responses. Every day these daughters of 
the convent were gathered together in the church. 
Jfyhram, as the father 9 stood in the midst of them, 
arrwginff and teaching them the various chwts, 8fC. 9 
till all the city was gathered together to him, and the 
adverse party was confounded and defeated. The ex- 
tant works of Ephraim prove that he must have dili* 
gently cultivated this art. A considerable portion of 
them consists of compositions in various metres. 
Whatever obscurity and doubt exist as to tho origin 
of hymnology among tho Syrians, it is certain that at 
no time subsequent to Ephraim did it reach a higher 
state of perfection than it attained to through the 
labours of that holy father. 

I have already said that the metre in which Barde- 
sanes wrote is pentesyllabic, i.e. that each line con** 
gists of five syllables* Metres in Syriac, so far as a 
knowledge of thorn has come down to us, consist not 
of a particular number of feet as tn, Greek and Latin, 
but of a certain number of syllables. Dr. Burgess, 
indeed, whose Essay on this subject In his " select 
metrical hymns and homilies of Ephraim Syrus," is 
by far the best with which, I am acquainted, thinks 
that there are traces of an artificial arrangement of 
words, by which the sense is in some cases obscured, 
and that there might have existed among them a 
theory as to accent, or quantity* If so, that theory 

02 



SYEIAC METEES. 

has not been discovered, and all thai we can yet say 
of a Syriac metro is, that it is determined by a certain 
number of syllables. In this respect they are similar 
to the measures of our o\vn hymns, except that the 
Syrians do not appoar to have written much in rhyme. 
Thus the octosyllabic metro woiild correspond to our 
long metre. The Hhortcst measure, so for as we are 
able to Bpealc, was tetntsylMic, and the longest 
The intermediate measures are pente- 
, h&MttyUhic 9 and ovloMjlluUo. Not one of 
thorn) motm<4 mn.s to be confined to subjects of a 
particular character; but all of thorn are found em- 
ployed in lively as will m in Holwuu compositions. 

To incc i t the ncwffisilinA of the metro wo find that 
SytuftWhiH and DWWHI'H arc Homctimos employed, of 
each of which wu will now briefly epoaL 

Syntorosifl in the contraction of two syllables into 
ono. It may bo regarded as a pootic licence indulged 
in to maintain tlw motro; thus, tho 5th rerse of the 
lt strophe of liyiun 49 already quoted is o!Wl]J 
]iox*0. Hero aro HIX syllablofl in a pentesyllabic 
hymn. Tfc to therefore necessary to make two syllables 
Into one- Now in verbs of tho Ethpaal conjugation 
tho mhliUfl vowol in sometimes withdrawn. Hence 
tho atom* vorms is i*oad foUkfatfb chfafaho. Synaoresis 
ooctttfl tn tho beginning of a word by taking away the 
initial vowel ; as, <wl ^ot^oZ Pmihirtm, Hero the 
gylkblo 1 i not pronounced. So also we meet with 



STEIA.O METRES, 197 



samenph, ^a| ^>ji hoclianph, &o. It is also 

// V " O 

met with in verbs ]a; as, c] fy d'lo*mar; in Greek 
words beginning with S> which, in passing into Syriac, 

9 <* 

takes the initial ] ; as, 0%wa Syr, ]snr>m] s&0a0. In 
words of three syllables, the vowel of the first is elided 
when the middle syllable has a long unchangeable 
vowel; as, UcoJ r'lntho* In the middle of a word 
the vowel is sometimes passed over in the pronuncia- 

J7 V * 

tion : in verbs; as, K^aZ] eihph'lag ; in nouns, espe- 
cially whoro the second syllable has tho vowel JL; as, 
]Zo<n3> allnttno. Tho vowel at the end of a word may 
fall away : in a verb, when the grammatical form will 
continue to bo known, notwithstanding tho Vowel is 
omitted in tho pronunciation; as, JaS& M'ph ; &afpo 

sob* with ; in a noun, as, 1^ pagr*. 

There are Instances whoro tho first syllable of a verse 
is taken away and made in tho pronunciation the last 
syllable of tho preceding verso, Thus the deficiency 
in tho first vorso is supplied by the redundancy of the 
next. In hymn 51> Tom. Ill, p. 94, lino 13, we have 
$ $ teoropen> where fooro ends oue verse, and pen 
begins the one which immediately follows. 

Die&rosis lengthens a word by ono syllable ; so that 
monosyllables become dissyllables, c. Dkeresis, 
therefore, performs pretty much the same office as 
Mefatffyono ( 9,)* Tho difference between them sedma 
to consist principally in this. Dicoreeis gives the force 
of a towel in the pronunciation, whore there would 



198 SYKIAC METRES. 

otherwise be a moving sheva 9 a,n& Mehagyono exercises 
the same force where there would otherwise be a 
quiescent sJieva. Examples are, ^ooiA^" lialayliun; 

* V v * 

as if ^ocnui^; }\~&& metlichze, pronounced in case of 
Disercsis wietlicheze ; onn^ schbak becomes in the same 
way schebak. 



APPENDIX. 

IT in sttttml in 10, that a simple point is some- 
f imrs used for various purposes. The practice of the 
Hyriiui writers appears to have been to employ a 
point, which, by its position above or below the letter 
to \Utirh it is aimuxcd, would determine the true 
signification of a word that would otherwise, in the 
til wn<p of the vowola, remain ambiguous. It is pro- 
IwWt 1 flint 1h position of this point defined in some 
di'^rw the kind of vowel intended to be supplied, 
and thus served UN ft quido in the pronunciation. The 
following iusiunct'B of its application, taken princi- 
pally from thft Grammars of Amira, Hoffman and 
l)<* Oini, will illustrate tho nature and utility of this 



j lj-1 r r j what 
\i\ |4 fl>fV 

w 

w 



* * 

>, pwi ttot 



lls 



200 APPENDIX, 



i 
{ " 

{^OJCTl 
V"? 
I ^*j0i 
I <***? 

( o& 
\ T^ 

IS 



coi oon 

*s " / *- 

ocn ocn 



king. 



infant* 
ywr. 



APPENDIX. 201 

It jippruvK, from the foregoing examples, that tMs 
point performed the office of vowels; that when it 
wan pluwrl ovor the letter, it denoted for the most 
part cmo of the vowels *, *, and when beneath the 
IrttiT, il denoted , *, or *. 

This point was further used to distinguish the 
prwrms and IITIHIS of verbs. "When it was put he- 
iti'jiili tlir It'tti'i*, ii di'iiolcd, 

I. All tho porMona of the prcoterite, the first of the 
sinif, ntinth. bring oxceptod- The tliird person sing. 
l'"tiu has ihin poini frwiucmtly on the left-hand side of 
llw last lit<<T I. 

& Tin* iuip(*nitiv and infinitive whenever any 
point iw Iniunl 

H. AH pofHonn of the future, the first of each 
mimtwr being nxocpted. 

\Vlwn it JH phurod above a letter in verbs, it de- 

Ulltt'H, 

I. Tlw llnrt. iMfHon of the pnotorite. 

2* Tim m*tlv pttrti<5iple; a to Pool coxtfug&tion 
i^J, l*fcel %ofc> %iuakj unless one of the 
1 o M riHtulrai It to bo placed below; as, >ou$io 

or >cu4& 

# 

. tho find pwwm of lioth numlras of the fixture. 
Tit* following paradigm af the Poal conjugation of 
will cxcwplUy wJmt luu been now etated. 



202 



APPENDIX. 



Fern, 



Yett. 



Prteterite. 

Masc. 

-9 3rd P 01 " 8 ' sing. 



2nd ............ 

i 1st ............ 

o 3rd pcrs. phi. 

1st ............ 



Imperative. 

^o^Lo sing. 
a^o^Lo plu. 

Future, 

o. 

lnj 3rd pors. 



j&) 1st 
u 3rd ...... 



Participle. 



APPENDIX. 

This point in some places is found with 
and in other places with another letter of the same 
word. The distinction is produced only by its situa- 
tion above or below the word. 

The Names of the Months. 

We give here the names of the Lunar Months, 
which occur very frequently in the Scriptures. 



October, 
November, 

December, 

- 
tM| cQia January, 

February, 
March* 






QAUBKIUGB. 
y, 1866. 



LIST OF WORKS 

PUBLISHED BT 

DElUIITOtf, BELL, AND 00. 

Agent* to ito TTnlverslty. 



ALP01UVR (Dm*) OrwkTofltament: with a critically revised 
Tuatt : * Ww*t of Vanoua Riadugfl, Marginal Bef&os to Verbal 
ul iMmuilto Uuag$ PwOwmona; and a Critical and Exogetical 
(tottuimitary. For iho ne of Theological Studeatu and Matters By 
lihNHy Arrows D.D., Itoaa of OwitcrljiQry, 

Vol l, Jtyth JSditioti, oontuninar Uxo Four Gospels. U. 8%. 



Vjl H ; fm MMim, ooateajiur th Aeto of the Apoetlw, the 
ntliifliis, U. 



VoL HI, towil 

j PhfllppUuiL 
l Philemon. 18*. 

IV. fturl I. nirrf JftiWow, oontainmg the Bpifitle to the 
Mi4 the Ottthollo Bplatlof of BtTjamM and elPeter 18^. 

Vl V, Pttrt II Third Sdition, oontftdnlng the Bptstles of St. 
ttftdSt, Jud^amdtlitBxmilAtion lit, 



* ,_ New Ttamont for English Readers. Containing 
thi* AnthorlHcd Yarmon, with twlditlonal coireotum* of Headings w. 
lU'ttfttTinKH ; MurKinal IlrtoronceR; and a Critical and Explanatory 
(!itiMtu*ntHry. Uy HKKIIT ALVoaii, U D,, Doon of Cantearbury. In 



A Plflft for the Qu*tt' B^uh; Stray Notes on 



By HBKET AI^OBD, D.D. 
for'tko 



LIST OP WOEKS PUBLISHED BY 



APOSTOLIC EPISTLES, A Oonoral Introduction to the, with 
a Table of Ht. 1'uul'n TruvelK, and an Ewwiy on tho Ntuto utter Heath. 
Second Mitwn, enlarged. To which are adilod, A Fuw Wwcta on tiro 
AtiianaHian Growl, on Justification by Fuith, and on the Ninth uml 
Seventeenth Articles of the Church of KngluuL By u 
CHAPIAIN. 8vo. 8*. ftf. 



BABINGTON s (CrruEoniiL, B.D., F.L.&) An Introductory 
Lecture on Archeology* dcllwwd before UN UnlvwHUy of <!umbrldK<' 
By COTHMJIULL IUHINIITOS, 1U>,, F.L ft. Hvo, price 3*. 

BAftRETT's (A. C.) Companion to the Now Toatamont. Do- 
algnod for the UHC of TncoloKioul Students ,m<l tlu* VWM Koniw ui 
Sohook By A. C BAHRKIT, ALA,, (tiuiihUollc^i. Kcup. Hvo, a*. 

HE A MONT'fl (W, J.) Cairo to Sinai and Hhiai to Cairo. HIMIIK 
an Account of a Janrnpy lu tlm Uem^rt of Aruhk, KovinitH*r mm 
DPoembor, 1800. By W. J. BKAM(HT, M, A, , Krlbw of Trinity ( Vlh^S 
Ottmbrldifc, And tiicutnbnit of Ht, Michael's flnHtbrl<lgo, wnwrtlttir 
Prindpal of thu KnKltoh CVjlIoKe, Jcrawilwm, With Mnpa and IlluKtrii 
tlonft. Foap. Hro, 5, 

- A Concise Grammar of the Arabic baritfuam 

RevUKl by HHBIXU Aw NADT Kr- HAKWNV. Ity W, J, HRA^M f, M-A, 



BLUNT's (RBV. J, J.) Five Mormons mnoluri Ix^foro tho 

nnivcrtlty of Cnmbrldfffl, The fimt Four In trnriiiulKnf, IWIU th*- Firth 

n TnumAay, Match Kth, 1H49, bring the Unwlrod Rnd Fifvlrth AtmK 

jmry of o HooiAty for J'rormKlnff <Jhrbrtli Ktwwlr<lKi', Iff th* 

to Itot, J, J, HLUMT, B.D. f lAdy Margttrot I'roftwr of t 

ro* 00,04. 

1, TwtH of the Truth of R*ret*tfcmv*a. On t 






BBOWNB's (Bi>.) Mowjfth aa F<ntvhnld and KsttwtrtL A 
Couwo of Hormom relating to th< Mnwluli, AK JntwiinicU Iwforc tttn 
doming- of GurlHt, I'mtoluKl boftnro thi* Uwlvmlty f (fentbriilw tit 
the . BHQU of ftbrujry n Miurch. 10, By tfo Rt(cht 
BluIwpofKJy, flyo, 4i. 



CAMBRtDGE ITairmity CalendAr, 1808* ftf. 

(Br. W. HO Nature and Off** 



BRIGHTON, BELL, AND 00. 



CHBVAIAIEB's (T.) Translation of iihe Epistles of Olemenl 
Sf iS?* jFSWJl and JMiatiUB ; and of the Apologies of JuriSx 
JJjrtJ* d JCwtugan ; wtth an fciteoduction and Bnef Notes din* 
te*tft of toe BocleriaBttoal Hurtory of the Rrst Two Oentnrjfta. Bj 
T, CarviLUKfi, B,D, tfwond jfttoton. STO, 12* 



COOPER'S faH, and THOMPSON) Athenae Cantabrigienses, 
By 0. tf. COOPSB, P S.A M andTnowBOM COOPBB, F.8.A. 

Thin work, in illustration of the biography of notable and enunem 
men who have been members of the TJniveiaty of Cambridge, com 
>' IB, noticow of 1, Authors 2 Cardinals, archbiflhops 
, ftblmts, heads of religious houses and other Ohuxoh digm- 

4. JTndftH an4 wafetot pnurtitfonAre prSe filvxl or SSSonlaw 




. .^_, , j imd poliUoal oplBioofl. 6 

i ftf & to, twoo. 7. Etttowt ~ 

al ttraotitloMw ^ 8. Arturta, murtoiMiB, an 

Keadn of collcgeR, profeMorv, and principal officers of the tug- 
Tctnity. 10. BenoCaoton to the uniYerslty and colleges or to the 
public at largo. 

Volume 1 1600-1585. Sro. 0Jpa, 18* Volume II. 1880 1609, 18* 
Volume III. InthePrest. 



DINOLE's (B^v, J.) Harmony of Revelation and Science. A 
Hertrt of KMftra op Th wlo /oal Qtujtionfl of tha Day, BytlwB^, 
J, Dtwit3 ldU,r tf,A.&L., liwtunbwt of LanohMl^ri Dtirhaa. Grow* 

8TO W. 



DONALDSON'S 



.) The Theatre of the Greeks. A 
fttttott of the Greek Dian: wi 
J, W-towiXMo^ B B 




Scholarship and Olasaical Learning 
ttomda^tcd with cupoolal roforonoo to dbmpotitlte Tests andTJnrreri$ 
A rnwtiwil Iffluia? on Ubetal Education By the W. 




LIST OF WOBK8 PUBLISHED BY 



ELLIS (BOBBRT LESLIE). Tho Mathematical and other 

WrittaKH of HOBRUT tai,ih KJ.MB, M.A , Mlow of Trinity dnlliMft 
CambrirtK*. Edltpd by WILLUK W wir, M, A., Trinity (Mlws with 
A BloKrauhioal Memoir by the Very Reverend UAUVKT (JtX)J>Wiw, IK I),, 
DeottofKly, Portrait. 8vo 10*. 



EWALD's (H.) Life of Jeans (Jhriab By U. EwiU>, Edited 
by OOTAVIUS OLOVXB, U.IX Crown 8vo, 0, 

PRAKCTS (Bar. JOHN), " The Bbcoroi^ of the Aottat Tlrtuw., 

iuoh w Oouraw and ratrltrtlwu, !. tntlrtlyoaxiHlftfnt with the Hplrft 
of the Oortpol ; n brinff the liurnty IMxc KMhuy frr I wa By the ftv. 

' 



J(itN FitANcrs, IV A,, Vic<>*Prin< i l|iul of Itihhap OIUT'H Truinlng < < ollfK* l t 
Bvo. 2& 



[Bir. J. M.) Bwav on tho Authmitimty of iho 
Book of Uanlel By tta Boy, / X. Fvi-iaa, M,A., flt Juhn'it 
HTO, ft*. 



ITUIU^SO, or, J^saget from tho Lifo of LUDWIO VON 
FromtlwOcrauw, KmiOiam (**. 



GOODWIN'S (DBA*) Doctrine* and Difficult^ of the (!hri.tmn 
luaiKlon oontomplAted ftom tlw Btan<iiitff-p<rtrvt umiutKl t>> tto< (thur 
Doctrine of tho ftta* of our txira Jcnun OlirU, it4nff tUn 
Lootoro* to the yr 1W5, By U. GOODWIH, 0, D* HruT fto. 



'The Glory of the Only Begotten of tho 
wcmlatlieMuihoo<loruiiri^' IWng thftJjtttom Uotum tor tlu 



, i;j;. 



Umo. 64. 

Srd Swte, Stoontt 



Praftw iw 
imtUif' Y 



DEIGHTON, BELL, AND 00. 



GOODWIN'S CDBijr) Ponr Sermons preached he&re the TJni* 
TOtty QfCwxtod|^ in the Season of A&rant, 18M. By H GOOJTON, 



Christ in the Wilderness. Four Sermon* preached 

Wore Hie University of Cambridge in the month of February, 185(1. 
By H. GOODWW, D,D. 12m it. 



Short Sermons at the Celebration of the Lord's 



Supper ByH GOODWIN, DJ> JiTew Edition 12nu>. 



Lectures upon the Church Catechism. By H. 



GOODWIN, D.D, ifcno. 4*. 



A Guide to the Parish Chnrch. By 



GOOJWH, D,D. Price 1, swd ; U 6d elotA. 



Confirmation Day. Being a Book of Instruction 



for Young Persons turn they ought to spend that solemn day. o 
thoy rttw the Vow* of their Baptifin- and we oontrmed hyme 
trlth ptwor and the Iflying on of haute By E. QOOD^W, 



the meaning of 
HftokfcM " 

Tlw Worthy Cb&^tiiuGant f ' ot, ', 



- Ihe Doom of Sin, and the Inspiration of the 

^KwaePritow, 
By BJJITBT GOODWTN, D.D 




Hands, Head, and Heart; or the Christian Be- 



IWoft wgtwdM PrudtoftUy, Jnteaectouaiy, a^ DevofapnaDy, 
Renoowi proachod before the Ottraatfy of damhndge. By 
GOODVIH, D J) Foap, STO, 2, 64. 



LIST OF WORKS PUBLISHED BY 



GOODWIN'S (PKAH) Tho Appearing of Jeans Chrisfc. A ahorfc 
Trwtiw by STKON PATRICK, l)^., fbrmorly Lord BUhnp of My, now 
publMiod 'for thp fiwt time from the Orlwtaal MS. &MHt by tho 
I>J,AN oy JSwr. 



oB on tho Goapela, intended for the 
Header, and udApteft either for Danawrtio or J?riv*t* Uo By 
AAVN v (JooDWiw, I). D, Crown 8ro. 
H. 



. _. On tlio Imitation of Ohrint. A Now Translation. 

By the DKAN oi" KI.Y. fr'tond Kdittoti Iflmo, 3r Hr/. 
Pi'Alt, Hvo. An Kdltlou iinntfd tin. r/Aiu.u I'Ai-int, TM 



FAUQUHAKSON), Tho 

of DUKCAW FAWH/UABHOM <}HKtiOUY, M.A M latr Ki*Ucw 
ItSnity Ckilh-jfo, OamUri^, KtUtctl liy WU.UAM WM.-KIH, W.A., 
Trinity cjHi,mv UwnbrW^. With tv Ui jrwihif ut M* m<iir 



<m MctU-m InWIwtu 
ofMor*llhiloiK>pby. 



(AEOKDXAOOK) History of the Article of H<i- 
To which in tultlMi u, Wfrtw of JTtoeuinMjt* from A A. JWW to 
wlttt 



HUMPHIty r 8 , flflfcr* V. 
^i*fe ^2* 

ofTntttty OoH 

nttlftll pOflt nVf/ 




KKNT'tf Commentary on International Law. HwM, with 
i doini to ttai 



LAMB (Esv. Joiur). Th* HWMI Word 

- -- 



DEIGHTON, BBLL, AJSTL 00. 



LEAO's (CotoffEL), The Topography of Athens, with some 

ranatkajm fejUfpty ^S^lMkon Two vok too^S*. 



Travels ia Northern flreeoe. Pom: vok, 8vo. witt 
Mapi^ g ^ 



Peloponnesiaoa, a Supplement to Travels in the 
Morea ELTO Haps. By COLONEL LSAXH. (Pub. at 15*.) 7*. 6d. 

- On Some Disputed QaestJons in Geography, wifii 

a Map of Africa. By COLOJTBL LEHB. (Pal), at 6, 8<) 44, At. 



Ntuniemata HeTlenica. witL. { 



dix, completing a Desonptive ( 

Coins, with. Notes Geographical and I 

COLQNBL LsAxa. 4to (Pub at 68.) 42, 



i and Appen- 

Thousand Chraek 

, Map, and Tndeg. By 



LEAPINGWELL's (DE. G.) Manual of the Roman Civil Lav, 
arranged according to the Syllabus of Dr. Hiixmx By G Laima- 
VBIL, XiL D. Dengned for the use of Studeats in the Umyecsitiee azid 
8vo 12i. 



LK1TB1S 




LTVINQSTOOT's (Ds,) Oambri V -Leofrnree. 

r tietbw to tiie jBtev Ptofwsor BTOOVIOK, M.A., 
- J - ' 





). Memoir of the late. By the BSJLJ? 
and an pngraTBd P<xrtratt from 



Tlw Large Paper Edition may still be had, price lOi, 6d. 

, E.) Twelve Sermons preached oix Yarions 
tjrciLOfBtMary 
at Oxford I9mo 



LIST OP WORKS PUBLISHED BY 



MASKEW'e (B*r, T. B.) Annotations on tho Ad* of th 
Apotlw. Original and neteftwt 1>PMM<*1 lutnrtottlljr A* t*w w* * 
CtutdidttM for the Or<Unury 11. A. ]>wn*, HtucUiiKtor Holy (mta* 
&o t) wltU Ot.Utw ami BfiitMl<nu KinmUifttton I'm***. By ttw 
,A, 4towid JWtlm, cMttrtrt. fa* to, 



MILL'S (REV. DR.) Observations on tlm attempted Appli^tion 
of PuntheJHtlo IMnoiplf* to tta Theory mid IlUtorto Ctttfc'kni of thit 
Qwraeli, By W. a M nft- i),U,, late ftoiriun i^^tur of 
tiM 6nltSftyof Cambridw. S^mrf ^W vf/A^ >I^ 
o^ Ki oiil^cw. Mid by hi* lAo^in-law, th K*r, l\ t 



Looturos on the Catochifltn. Delivorod in th> 
Church of Knuttcd, In the Dlocpw of r^iti'rliMry, y W, Et< 
D.D. EkllUxIbythcKov, 13. Wwai^.A. ftup' N w. 0*. tU, 



BormonB preaohod in Lent IMS* and cm (wontl former 

Uy W, I L Mti.i,, ti. 



Four Sonnoiw prcmohod Ixiforo tbu TFnivt^n*ity on (h 
Fifth, of Norember nU tlio thwo Huttdayn itn'MtliiiK Atlvrm, in rlw 



..... An AnalyftiK of Uio Kxi^Hiiion of tho dmNl, written 
by Uie Ktfrht tU-vrrml ftthcr lit OtMt, J. PKAIlMtX, tUl,, 
Bishop of Chrafc'r. <:otaplcd, ^ It h urttiM' mtUKhrtut R 
lntr^nwl t far tbr u< of Kt^tftu of Ltt^^' 
By W, It Miu* at). rA/rd AWi/.^, rtflmi w& wr 

MISSION LTFti amoi tho Zula-Kaflm. Mm^ of 



MOEHlff (Jo0w) Word* of Comft>rt fiir tlu* Wnyfcr<ir t fto 




BRIGHTON, BELL, AND 00. 



PEARSON'S (Rsv. J. B.) The Divino Ptewmdtty, being a 
Conmderatlcm of the \rgnmenta to prove that the Author of Nature Is 
a Being endued with liberty and choice. Tho Buniey Prlae fibsay for 
1M4, By 3 B, PMKMN, B,A , Hcholor of Ht, JoUnB College/and 
Curate of Ht Michael's Church, Cambridge, 8vo. 10, fcf , 



PIEROTTJ'H (EEMETE) Jerusalem Explored : being a Descrip- 
tion of the Anefont and Modmi City, with upwatdn of One Hundred 
TlhiHtratlorw, cnnHiHting of Vlmm, Qround-plan f and AeotionH By 
Ktmi:T PIKHOTTT, Doctor of MttthomutlcR, (^ntitn of the Corni of 
KnKiUrtTH IA th< ttnny of Hnrdinla, Aichitoct-Kntfibocr to hi* Ex 
Hooruya Puaha of JoruwilMu, and ArohiUMit of tlui Holy Land 



Tlio Cuntomfl fttid Traditions of Palostino Oom- 

naml with th* B(bk, from OlwmitHon* mode daring A it^ldimoo of 
falj(ht TimrB. By Dr. BKXKTK PUBKKTX, Auttwr of "JeruwOom 

TO. 01* 



PHILLIPB* (Rnv. GBO.) Short Bermon on Old ToetAraent 

M*lanifl I'cits pmMhcd in ttu* Ohaptl of Qtimw' OoUaff,X^nibridM, 
By Uw Jftw, OKO, liuiM D.D., l>mklentof tHe OoIlagA. Bro. U. 



PSALTER (Tlie) or TValmg of Drna in EnKlUhVero. With 
ami KoU*. Ay * Hmuter of tho UnJvwtity 
to the Lmi !M of ttty, i 




B'$ (. H.) JPtah Inte>aw*ten to Ih* Oritjotam ol 







10 LIST OF WOBKB PUBLISHED BY 



HCJUVENER'8(F. H.) A Full Collation of tho Codex Rind- 
UI-IH with the Itwlvrd TW f th* N'W 'IVtnmr,nt: to which in 
nHlxwl a CritM Intioduotioa. l\y V. il, Hnuvuwu, ,ftlA. Pup, 
Bvo, 3#. 

' Mr, Htrtiwnrr him now plwwl thti iwiUN of TlwhrtuIorfX cllwinwry 
within tilt* ttwh of ull m A riuniiutK little volume, ^hicti <mtrhl to 
the <rwk Ti^Uiiidit ui the Mbrury of <t\* 
' 



nm^ In th^ 



An Kauri Tmnwnpl of tlu'(tni>nx AriKNKr. 
MwtMwtrlpt in t'nrinl Irtfrv* ttf H. I'/mtV 



wlilwt w Full T 



lirturnry f Trmlty (' t ,!!', <HimtiHafi To nhui 1, 
Unfion itf Mfty Mnntivrltt*i roriMlnlntt v,num . |NirtlntiH 



of lh* k <iH'*k NY* 'IV.t.iuunt ilnmifi*l in f iiHlnli Lili^iiit'^ with 
u full f'nlUMl liilrodmtuMU ll> I'' It. *ikm;%Hi, M,A lU.y.il lu<i 

ttfi '. 

TUi < ( ni*' 



^. Novum Tiwlnim-nium Urn^itii Tf'rttw Ktn*tlm- 

tl*-^ 
K H. 



I* 

VrtlHit*i#p,t far jftfut I/", 



At|tttlu<, 

J , KUlttll MM* If M. 

hi 

I'MfJ 

in 

ilM, 

OrWoftln 



| K,f , fl 

Centra (VUuni, T/ttmr I. 



in Vri^rxw Ti^ttnirrtt** t**pt 




DBTOHTON, BELL, AND CO, 11 



SINKER'S (REV. R.) The Charactorfotie Difference* betwwm 
the IkwkM of tht* N r c* TfttMiicnttiul ihf unufcllftit'ly prccttlinfr^C'wUti, 
and the lmau*dUlf4jr Muvwdbig GtuMUn Utt'iutuw, crm*irUtnfl MM tui 
evidence of the IHviiw Authority <if tlio New ToHtatncut Ikuzitf tiw 
TJulH'nn I'nin' h<"uiy for 1MM, By tlw* Itrv R. HiMCfcn, Trinity t 
HmallHm 



STUDKNT'S (JUIDK (Tho) to thft Umvormty of 

Keup.Hvo. 



fntnuluHltni f h> f J. It Srru r v f MA 
wn'H, ty tltr Urr II. fAin\M, M,\, <n thf 
by J- it. rittiftY, M.A. On thi* (Vtiir^ 
Trlixw, by tht JU v, U, I}I*HN, M, A, 1^1 th Court* of rUf*rtio r frir 
the* MntYMttMflnd Trtitni, Hs tbr ItftV. W, M. ('*% .!>, (to 
ttH'C'rmr... r^f KtwliitK ^ *Iir MnNl H(|H^ Trljx^, br thr K^v, 
4, a Mvvoi,, M,\, <m llr ffmr* nf Kiwilwt V t^ NutMnU 
i Trip*! h> l^tittr^ir I.i>t'iN^, M,A. On Law MmiUn ftttrt 
rmfr,Mifr J.T, Am*, M,I>. -Mid^U Xhwlf utwt 
, III Mi<tmv t M,l. 
, JItnoi,ii Ilmtwwr, 

dvll Htrvkr nt ImU'u^y tin Hv. It, tiAifU t 
KxrfiuitmttiMt,* of th( Cui^i>it,v by 11 J. f 
Hf<rvlr',-MniUil Ammut f the M^ 



Tim AwJ^y or 
tulliuit Wlih Fi^rti<h N<t*r* iiut u I^AIIHS littHit|l n4 on 



dwtimt t< tin- Miu.Iy nf l^trUkiit ytMt K"l,^tiii4Hi Utmlty. 

' M. 



U* A, Wwimuft, I 4 ri.l>. AVY0'{ M/I'IUM ttvi, ft* 

TODD'fl (HKV. J, P.) Thn Aiionllo Paul tmd tlio 

(Jhtm-li of ri.lUpt.l, Au K*p*wUiun CHt.ml MV! IrHrilcJ tl thf 
tecntli rtuiptrr Tif thi^ Art. ir tlii'sUwHrtt^ nii(j of tU^ Kr^Htlm to ttw 
ruilmphmH. My tw Ut tar. J. F. Totn., M,A, t Tnnhy 



TURTON'n ([jrnor) Tho Tloly Cnthollc Doctrine of tlir 

to (tr, Wl^mmi'j* AwrnitNtt fhi wl|t* 
*>, HI, n /. 



ml Transom 1t r a ft. 0, 

" 



WATBRT/XX A U 



of tha Four 
m tfe 



'* (d A.) P*Hh Hifrnwni* woonHnif to UM <>r4tr of 

ti^Oltffciiw Yrw, By tlw U*> A A. Wmi^J^A, BOtttdVyJ, K. 



u WOIIKH prni.wiiKn IIY imnamiN, UKLU & <,u 



UrilKWKiil/H (Ui,v, Dr.) Ktaumte of Mimd'to, including 
IWH, H, ito- IKiv W. ttmrni, 1 I)., Mi.tor of fatally rtaUiw, 
tWdlilu*. frrrA/>W<*u,iiiit<ii, sto. Ifo, 



|ji*(*tiHY<i on tlw History of Moral Philowphy 
IV !to< llw W. WururM,, H l>. A' 
rht\n> H'ftM <t>i't*'*'.nir> /.nfwn A, 



diDMiirr pliuttfl 

wlih hn\" {mrrh^Hl thr tornur Ivutlon 



ilcri'fl 



mum* 



.' ^ , . - i 

*J*'"I> ' '^ * '"Mi,Vvi of ?M Vf*> ^V 

n M c,i* ,t< M 



,1,1 S' (Uuv. il) r (V Aroint ttir.il ilitlnr 

ttn. s tty tw AUi II MIMI i, I 1 ft ',, J^M'.^hn tW*"',< 4, 



WIN WMI, Mfi^n, ir.t^ rulUl Umiin.v A.K <fti>. *75iV 



WIU, JAMS' rU'>wt,vM*) UuioMiHi lirMlm.^ AtW tbn Mimi 

< MiHs4*, K 
ti*, frm f^*. 




(A. 11*) NM* ami Di*wrruwtm